JP2019111403A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of efficiently managing drive of a drive part by using a retention period and a cooling period.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 drives a putout motor 174 for driving first and second sprockets 173A and 173B capable of moving game balls passing through first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B to a putout passage, then stops it for a falling ball monitoring time, and executes determination relating to detection of game balls during that time. In the falling ball monitoring time, a current to be applied to the putout motor 174 is retained to a driving current during excitation data retention period for retaining attitude of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B; however, in a cooling period of cooling the putout motor 174, the current to be applied to the putout motor 174 is lower than the driving current of the drive part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, A number of gaming balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the gaming ball that has won the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time from the closing state.

  By the way, in recent years, in order to improve the effectability, the gaming machine has been provided with movable roles. As such a game machine, in Patent Document 1, after each of the first and second upper peach movable members is pivoted to open outward, the first and second upper peach movable members are closed inward. A first magnet and a second magnet provided on the inner side of each of the seams of the first and second upper peach movable members; The first and second upper pink movable members substantially face each other when the first and second upper pink movable members are closed, and in such a state, the first and second magnet portions are arranged in a direction to draw each other. Game machines are disclosed.

JP, 2014-87611, A

  By the way, in the conventional game machine like patent document 1, to manage the drive of a drive part efficiently using a holding | maintenance period and a cooling period was desired.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently managing driving of a drive unit using a holding period and a cooling period.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine described later) including a movable role (for example, a second movable job 710 or the like described below) which is rotated by driving a driving means (for example, a motor 712 described later). A game machine 1 or the like), wherein the movable part is provided with a first member tooth portion (for example, a base tooth portion 711d or the like described later) in which a plurality of teeth projecting in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge A first movable member main body (for example, a base member 711 or the like, which will be described later) and a first movable member main body (for example, a base member 711 or the like) A first movable member main body 713a or the like) and a gear rotatably supported by the first movable member main body, and engaged with the first member tooth portion (for example, a first transmission described later) And the game machine stores the game balls. Possible ball supply passages (first and second ball supply passages 171A, 171B), and moving means (first and second sprockets 173A, 173B), a drive unit (payout motor 174) for driving the moving means, a control means (payout CPU 301) for controlling the drive of the drive unit, and a game ball moved to the payout passage by the moving means (The first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B), and the control means drives the drive unit and then drives the drive unit for a predetermined period (falling ball monitoring Time) stop, and the determination regarding the detection of the gaming ball by the payout detection means is performed during the predetermined period, and the attitude of the moving means is maintained for the predetermined period At least including a holding period (excitation data holding period) and a cooling period (cooling period) for cooling the drive unit, and during the holding period, a current applied to the drive unit is a current at the time of driving the drive unit. During the cooling period, the current applied to the driving unit is lower than the current at the time of driving the driving unit.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like to be described later) is pivoted from the standby position to the driving position by driving a driving unit (for example, a motor 712 or arm member 723 or the like described below). A member (for example, a rotating member 725 or the like described later), a connecting member (for example, a second connecting member 726 or the like described below) provided on the rotating member and rotating around a predetermined position; An electric decoration (for example, an electric decoration 727 described below, etc.) provided on the rotating member with a tape measuring section (for example, a measurement width 728a described later, etc. described below) formed and having an urging force in the winding direction A connecting member (for example, a flat cable 728 described later, etc.) to which one end is connected, and in the connecting member, a direction in which a part of the tape portion is engaged with the connecting member at one end side By the bias to Urges the serial rotating member in the direction of the standby position, the other end of the base member rotating member is provided (e.g., the base member 721 such as described below) and which are located on.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine described later) including a movable role (for example, a second movable job 710 or the like described below) which is rotated by driving a driving means (for example, a motor 712 described later). A game machine 1 or the like), wherein the movable part is provided with a first member tooth portion (for example, a base tooth portion 711d or the like described later) in which a plurality of teeth projecting in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge A first member (for example, a base member 711a or the like described later) having a first member main body (for example, a base body 711a or the like described later), and the first member rotatably supported by the first member; A first movable member main body (for example, a first movable member main body 713a described later, etc.) which is pivoted by driving, and a gear rotatably supported by the first movable member main body; The first transmission member that meshes (for example, the first transmission described later) A first movable member (e.g., a first movable member 713 or the like described later) having a material 713b and the like, and the first movable member so as to be pivotably supported by the first movable member and project in the radial direction along the outer edge A second movable member including a second movable member tooth portion (for example, a second movable member tooth portion 714c or the like described later) in which a plurality of teeth are arranged, and the second movable member tooth portion meshes with the first transmission member And a member (e.g., a second movable member 714 described later).

The gaming machine having such a configuration is provided with a movable part that is rotated by the drive of the drive means.
The movable part comprises a first member, a first movable member, and a second movable member.
The first member has a first member main body provided with a first member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge.
The first movable member is a first movable member main body that is pivotally supported by the first member and that is pivoted by the drive of the drive unit, and a gear that is pivotally supported by the first movable member main body. And a first transmission member meshing with the first member tooth portion.
The second movable member is rotatably supported by the first movable member and has a second movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge, and the second movable member The teeth mesh with the first transmission member.

  Thereby, when the drive means is driven, the first movable member main body is pivoted. When the first movable member main body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear supported by the first movable member main body, also moves. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by meshing movement with the first member tooth portion of the first member. And if a 1st transmission member rotates, the 2nd movable member which has a 2nd movable member tooth part meshed with a 1st transmission member will rotate.

  That is, the driving force for rotating the first movable member is generated from the driving means. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member is generated by movement of the meshing position between the first transmission member and the first member tooth portion of the first member along with the rotation of the first movable member main body. Do.

  As described above, the driving force for pivoting the first movable member and the second movable member is not only generated simply by the driving means, but also the portions where the driving force is generated are different from each other. Therefore, for example, the drive mode of the first movable member can be determined by the drive means, and the drive mode of the second movable member can be determined by the first member. For example, two movable members can be determined by one drive means. It is possible to drive in different ways.

  Therefore, while the first movable member and the second movable member are interlocked with each other, the first movable member and the second movable member are rotated by the driving forces having different occurrence points. For this reason, it becomes possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable part which consists of a plurality of movable members, and it becomes possible to give an individual rendering effect to each movable member, and to enhance the rendering effect synergistically. Therefore, even in the case where a plurality of movable members are interlocked, it is possible to enhance the individual rendering effects of the respective movable members and to improve the interest of the player in the rendering.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the first member is further rotatably supported by the first member main body, and is rotated by the driving of the driving means (for example, described later) Of the first member main body, the first member tooth portions are provided in a pair, and the first movable member main body is provided with a plurality of protruding in the radial direction along the outer edge. And a first movable member tooth portion (for example, a first movable member tooth portion 713d described later, etc.) in which the teeth are arranged, the first movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member, and the first movable member tooth portion The transmission member meshes with one of the first member teeth, and the movable part is further pivotally supported by the first member and has an outer edge, and the radial direction is along the outer edge. Movable member teeth portion in which a plurality of teeth projecting in a row are arranged (for example, third movable member teeth described later) A third movable member main body (e.g., a third movable member main body 715a etc. described later) and a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body, and the other first member tooth A third movable member (eg, a third movable member 715 described below, etc.) having a third transmission member (eg, a third transmission member 715b described later, etc.) meshing with the part, and pivoted to the third movable member A fourth movable member toothed portion (for example, a fourth movable member toothed portion 716c described later, etc.) having a plurality of pivotally supported outer rims along which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged. A fourth movable member (e.g., a fourth movable member 716 described later, etc.) in which the fourth movable member tooth portion engages with the third transmission member, and the third movable member tooth portion The first movable member, the second movable member, and the second movable member mesh with the second transmission member. The second transmission member, the first movable member, the second movable member, and the fourth movable member move from the initial position to the drive position where the movable member and the fourth movable member stop after rotating from the initial position. The movable member and the fourth movable member integrally form a formed body having a predetermined shape.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the first member has a second transmission member in addition to the first member main body.
The second transmission member is rotatably supported by the first member main body, and is rotated by the drive of the drive means. Further, the first member main body is provided with a pair of first member tooth portions.
The first movable member main body has a first movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge.
The first movable member teeth mesh with the second transmission member. In addition, the first transmission member meshes with one of the first member tooth portions.
The movable part has a third movable member main body and a fourth movable member in addition to the first member, the first movable member, and the second movable member.
The third movable member has a third movable member main body and a third transmission member. The third movable member main body is rotatably supported by the first member, and has a third movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge. The third transmission member is a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body, and meshes with the other first member tooth portion.
The fourth movable member is pivotally supported by the third movable member, has an outer edge, and has a fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge. The fourth movable member teeth mesh with the third transmission member.
The third movable member teeth mesh with the second transmission member.
Then, by moving the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member to the drive position, which is a stopped position after rotating from the initial position, the second transmission member, the first movable member A forming body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member.

Thereby, when the drive means is driven, the second transmission member is rotated. A third movable member main body having a first movable member main body having a first movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member when the second transmission member rotates and a third movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member Rotate.
When the first movable member main body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear supported by the first movable member main body, also moves. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by meshing movement with one of the first member tooth portions of the first member.
In addition, when the third movable member main body rotates, the third transmission member, which is a gear supported by the third movable member main body, is also moved. At this time, the third transmission member rotates by meshing movement with the other first member tooth portion of the first member.
And if a 1st transmission member rotates, the 2nd movable member which has a 2nd movable member tooth part meshed with a 1st transmission member will rotate. In addition, when the third transmission member rotates, the fourth movable member having the fourth movable member toothed portion that meshes with the third transmission member pivots.

  That is, in addition to a 1st movable member and a 2nd movable member, a 3rd movable member and a 4th movable member also rotate by a 2nd transmission member rotating by the drive of a drive means. Thus, in addition to the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member can be driven by one driving means. Further, similarly to the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member are interlocked, but are rotated by the driving forces generated at different places. For this reason, since it is possible to make the drive aspect of a 2nd movable member and a 4th movable member, and the drive aspect of a 1st movable member and a 3rd movable member different, four movable members are one by one drive means. It is possible to drive in different ways.

  In addition, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move to the drive position, whereby the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the third movable member The fourth movable member integrally forms a formed body having a predetermined shape.

  Therefore, while the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member can be interlocked, it is possible to diversify the variation of the operation, and at the same time, the predetermined shape at the drive position. It becomes possible to form and complete it. Therefore, each movable member can have an individual rendering effect, and it becomes possible to synergistically enhance the rendering effect, and it is also possible to improve the rendering effect as the entire movable combination.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the movable part moves the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member to the drive position. In this case, the end portions of the second movable member and the fourth movable member come close to each other to form a complete structure.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the end of the second movable member pivotally supported by the first movable member and the end of the fourth movable member pivotally supported by the third movable member are close to each other at the drive position. As a result, the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member constitute a complete state in which one component is formed. As a result, it is possible to rotate the plurality of movable members individually to the drive position, and to form a structure in which all of the movable members are connected at the drive position. Therefore, each movable member can have an individual rendering effect, and it becomes possible to synergistically enhance the rendering effect, and it is possible to further improve the rendering effect as the entire movable combination.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a game area where the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 120a or the like to be described later) and a game ball can easily pass a specific area (for example, a specific area 611c or the like A first movable member (for example, a V shutter 612 or the like described later) in one of the state and the second state in which the game ball does not easily pass through the specific area; When the first movable member is in the first state, a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h described later for guiding the gaming ball having passed through the specific area) And the like, and at least a part of the gaming ball guided by the guide passage, such as a variable winning device (for example, a second big winning device 610 described later), The apparatus comprises the first movable member In the first state, the passage detection of the game ball entered into the variable winning device is detected, and a first passage detection means (for example, a right prize ball sensor described later) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player 613, a left prize ball sensor 614, etc.) and the first passage detection means provided below the first passage detection means, and the game ball can easily pass through a predetermined area (for example, a first guide passage 611f described later) The second movable member (for example, the V-Bello 615 or the like described later) which is in one of the second states in which the game ball hardly passes the predetermined area, and the second movable member is in the first state At the time of the game, it is possible to detect the game ball having passed through the predetermined area among the game balls having passed through the first passage detection means, and it is possible to give an advantageous game state to the player when the passage of the game ball is detected. Second passage detection means (for example, V prize sensor 616 described later) And third passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball which has not passed through the predetermined area among the game balls which have passed through the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the second state For example, a decelerating unit (e.g., a decelerating unit 611 j described below) capable of decelerating the rolling speed of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined area is further provided in the predetermined area. It is characterized by being distributed.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a gaming area in which gaming balls can be rolled, and a variable winning device.
The variable winning device has a first movable member and a guide passage. The first movable member is in one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes the specific area and a second state in which the game ball hardly travels the specific area. The guide passage is provided in the game area, and guides the game ball having passed through the specific area when the first movable member is in the first state. Then, the variable winning device can visually recognize at least a part of the gaming ball guided by the guidance passage.
In addition, the variable winning prize device includes a first passage detecting unit, a second movable member, a second passage detecting unit, and a third passage detecting unit.
The first passage detection means detects the passage of the gaming ball having entered the variable winning device when the first movable member is in the first state, and makes it possible to give a predetermined gaming value to the player.
The second movable member is provided below the first passage detecting means, and is one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the predetermined area and a second state in which the game ball hardly passes the predetermined area. It becomes one state.
The second passage detection means can detect the game ball having passed through the predetermined area among the game balls having passed the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the first state, and the passage of the game ball is When it is detected, an advantageous game state can be given to the player.
The third passage detection means can detect the game ball which has not passed through the predetermined area among the game balls which have passed through the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the second state.
And in the predetermined area, there is disposed a decelerating portion capable of decelerating the rolling speed of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined area.

Thus, for example, when the first movable member (e.g., the shutter etc.) is in the first state (e.g., the open state), the gaming ball having entered the variable winning device is guided by the guide passage. At the same time, at least a part of the gaming ball is visible.
And since the first passage detection means (for example, a prize ball sensor), the second passage detection means (for example, a winning sensor), and the third passage detection means (for example, a discharge sensor) are provided in the game area, It is possible to detect game balls rolling on the area. For this reason, the gaming ball can roll the gaming area at least immediately before the gaming ball is detected by each passage detection means.

  Therefore, by making at least a part of the gaming ball visible to the player from the moment the gaming ball enters the variable winning device to the arrival of each winning sensor, the gaming ball in the winning device can be viewed. It is possible to improve the visibility of the In addition, since it becomes possible to roll the game area until the game ball is detected by each passage detection means, it is possible to perform effects using the game ball rolling the game area even within the variable winning device. It is possible to improve the rendering effect for the player.

  Further, since the guidance passage is provided in the game area, and the first passage detection means, the second passage detection means and the third passage detection means are provided in the game area, the game area can be used as a part of the variable winning device Therefore, for example, it becomes possible to omit the passage path of the game ball provided on the back side of the conventional game board, and to simplify the configuration of the variable winning device.

  In addition, when the game ball rolling on the game area passes the second passage detection means, if it passes with the speed rolling on the game area, the rolling speed is too fast, and the second passage detection means It is also considered that the passage of the ball can not be accurately detected, and in order for the second passage detection means to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling on the game area, It is possible to use a speed reduction unit to adjust the rolling speed of such gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the gaming ball by the passage detection means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the variable winning device is provided between the plurality of first passage detection means, the first movable member and the first passage detection means, and the identification A contact member (for example, a contact member 611d or the like described later, etc.) that can contact the gaming ball that has passed the area, and the gaming ball that has passed the specific area, one of the first passage detection means and the other of the first passage The game machine further comprising a sorting unit (eg, a sorting unit 611e described later, etc.) which can be sorted to any of the detection means, wherein the second movable member The gaming ball which can pass through the predetermined area when in the 1 state and has passed through the other first pass detection means is detected by the third pass detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member It is characterized by

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable winning device further includes a plurality of first passage detection means, a contact member, and a distribution unit.
The contact member is provided between the first movable member and the first passage detection means, and can be in contact with the gaming ball having passed through the specific area.
The distributing unit can distribute the gaming ball having passed through the specific area to one of the first passage detecting means and the other of the first passage detecting means.
And the game ball which has passed one of the first passage detection means can pass through the predetermined area when the second movable member is in the first state. Further, the game ball having passed through the other first passage detection means is detected by the third passage detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member.

Thereby, for example, when the gaming ball rolls from the upstream to the downstream of the first movable member, the speed of the gaming ball is reduced by the gaming ball coming into contact with the contact member on the downstream side, and the gaming ball of the player It is possible to raise awareness about
In addition, the distributing unit can distribute the game ball to either one of the first passage detecting means and the other first passage detecting means. The gaming ball having passed one of the first passage detecting means may pass through the second passage detecting means capable of giving an advantageous gaming state to the player, but the other first passage detecting means The game ball having passed through passes through the third passage detecting means without passing through the second passage detecting means. That is, whether or not it becomes advantageous for the player is determined by the rolling of the gaming ball in the distribution unit.

  Therefore, the game property is improved by the distributing portion, and the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced immediately before the distributing portion in which the game property is improved by the contact member. Therefore, the visibility to the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to further improve the rendering effect for the player in the variable winning device.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the distance between the other first passage detecting means and the first movable member is greater than the distance between one of the first passage detecting means and the first movable member It is characterized in that the contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means, and not provided above the one first passage detection means.

As a result, the distance between the other first passage detection means and the first movable member is shorter than the distance between the one first passage detection means and the first movable member. Among the game balls passing between the first movable member and one of the first passage detecting means, the rolling speed of the gaming ball passing between the first movable member and the other first passage detecting means In this case, it may be difficult to detect the passage of the gaming ball by the other first passage detection means, but it is possible to reduce the rolling speed of the gaming ball by the contact member. The passage detection means can also reliably detect the passage of the game ball.
Further, since the contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means and not provided above the one first passage detection means, the contact members are provided above both the first passage detection means It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost more than the gaming machine.

  Here, the game ball having passed through one of the first passage detection means can be detected by the second passage detection means when the second movable member is in the first state. The second passage detection means can detect the game ball having passed through the predetermined area when the second movable member is in the first state, and when it detects the passage of the game ball, a game state advantageous to the player Can be granted. Therefore, temporarily, the contact member is provided also above one of the first passage detection means, the second movable member is in the first state, the gaming ball contacts the contact member, and the drop speed is reduced. The second movable member may be in the second state before the game ball passes through the predetermined area, and the game ball may not pass through the second passage detection means capable of providing an advantageous game state. In such a case, the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  However, the contact member is provided only above the other first passage detection means, and not provided above one of the first passage detection means, so that the contact member gathers the player's awareness of the game ball. It is possible to prevent the decrease in interest for the game.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, described later) including a movable part (for example, an upper left third movable part 720 or the like described below) which is rotated by driving a driving unit (for example, a motor 722 described below). Pachinko gaming machine 1), wherein the movable part has a first member (for example, a base member 721 or the like described later) to which the driving means is attached, and a predetermined position (for example, the later described member) A second member (for example, an arm member 723 described later, etc.), which is pivotally supported at a predetermined position 723a etc.) and rotated by the drive of the driving means, and the second member And a pivoting member (for example, described later) which is pivoted about the predetermined position and rotated about a specific position (for example, a specific position 725a described later, etc. described later) separated from the A rotating member 725 and the like), The rotation member has a gear (for example, a second connection member 726 described later, etc.) which rotates around the specific position according to the rotation of the second member, and the gear has a peripheral edge thereof A contact member (for example, a contact member 726b described later, etc.) is formed, and in rotation around the specific position, the rotation is from a standby position to start the rotation to a drive position to end the rotation, The contact member may be biased by the magnetic force in the direction of the drive position in the vicinity of the drive position.

The gaming machine having such a configuration is provided with a movable part that is rotated by the drive of the drive means.
The movable part comprises a first member, a second member, and a pivoting member. The first member has a drive means attached. The second member is rotatably supported by the first member about a predetermined position, and is rotated by the drive of the drive means. The pivoting member is pivotally supported by the second member so as to pivot about a predetermined position and pivot about a specific position separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance.
Further, the pivoting member has a gear that pivots about a specific position in response to the pivoting of the second member. The gear is formed with a contact member at its peripheral edge. Further, the gear is rotated from the standby position at which rotation starts, to the drive position at which rotation ends, in rotation around the specific position. The abutment member can be biased by a magnetic force in the direction of the drive position in the vicinity of the drive position.

Thereby, for example, when the drive means is driven, the second member is rotated, and when the second member is rotated, the rotation member is rotated from the standby position to the drive position about the specific position. For example, if the second member etc. is provided with a magnet (or a component formed of ferromagnetic material) with which the contact member of the gear contacts in the drive position, and the contact member is formed of ferromagnetic material (or magnet), the gear In the standby position, the contact member is not biased by maintaining a constant distance between the magnet and the contact member.
On the other hand, when the gear is rotated to the drive position, proximity or contact between the magnet and the contact member makes it possible to bias the item by the attraction (magnetic force) of either one.

  As described above, by providing the contact member, which is urged by the magnetic force at the driving position for ending the rotation, to the gear for rotating the movable rotation member, the service such as the rotation member is a single body. Even in the configuration where driving is performed, the state after operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, the configuration capable of fixing the moving item makes it possible to easily stabilize the state after the moving of the item.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the rotating member is attached to the gear, and an electric decoration (for example, an electric decoration 727 described later) that emits light in a predetermined mode; Is formed in a rolled shape so as to be elastically deformable by being wound around a core, and has a rolled portion (for example, a rolled portion 728a described later, etc. described below) having an urging force in the winding direction, and a connection connected with the electric decoration A member (for example, a flat cable 728 or the like described later), the gear is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a storage portion (for example, a storage portion 726c or the like A locking portion (for example, a locking portion 726d or the like described later, etc.) to be locked to one end of the housed tape-shaped portion, and the tape-shaped portion is wound in the direction in which the one end is wound inside the housing portion Through the locking portion by the biasing force of And wherein the biasing said gear toward said waiting position.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the pivoting member includes the electric decoration and the connection member. The illumination body is attached by being fixed to a gear or the like, and emits light in a predetermined manner. The connection member is wound around a specific position and formed into a tape shape that can be elastically deformed, and includes a tape portion having an urging force in a winding direction, and is connected to the electric decoration.
In addition, the gear has an accommodation portion and a locking portion. The accommodating portion is formed in a tubular shape and accommodates the tape measure. The locking portion locks one end of the tape-shaped portion housed in the housing portion.
Then, the tape-shaped portion elastically deforms in the winding direction inside the storage portion, thereby biasing the gear toward the standby position through the locking portion.

  By elastically deforming the winding portion of the connection member in the winding direction inside the housing portion of the gear, and biasing the gear by the elastic force of the connection member in the direction to rotate the gear via the locking portion, The movable speed can be increased, and since the gear is used as the storage position of the connection member, space can be saved.

Here, when a gear is used for the movable part, usually, a backlash is provided between the gear and another member meshing with the gear in order to smoothly rotate the gear. This backlash causes the member attached to the gear to move slightly when the gear is stopped.
However, in the rotating member, the measuring tape is formed on the connecting member connected to the electric decoration attached to the gear, and the measuring tape is biased in the direction in which one end thereof is wound in the housing of the gear. By biasing the gear in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion locked thereby, it is possible to reduce the fine movement of the pivoting member caused by the backlash when the gear is stopped.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention has a game area (for example, a game area 120a or the like described later) in which game balls can roll, and a winning device (for example, a game area described later) in which game balls rolling the game area can enter. A game machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later, etc.), and the winning device can detect that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area A first inducible state in which the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area and a non-inducible first induction based on the fact that a predetermined driving condition is established (for example, the prize detection means 514 described later) and the like. A first movable piece (for example, a first movable piece 515 described later, etc.) which can be driven to the impossible state, and the first movable piece are provided above, and the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece The second inducible state and the second indivisible state which can not be A second movable piece (for example, a second movable piece 516 described later), and the first movable piece is driven from the first non-inducable state to the first inducible state; The second movable piece is driven from the second non-inducable state to the second inducible state, and the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area by the first movable piece, and the first movable piece is the first induction. When the second movable piece is driven from the second inducible state to the second inducible state when driving from the possible state to the first inducible state, the predetermined movement by the first movable piece is performed. It is possible to interrupt the guidance of the gaming ball to the area by the second movable piece.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a gaming area in which the gaming ball can roll, and a winning device in which the gaming ball rolling on the gaming area can enter.
The winning device includes a winning detection means, a first movable piece, and a second movable piece. The winning detection means can detect that the gaming ball has passed the predetermined area. The first movable piece is drivable to a first inducible state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the predetermined area and in a first inducible state that can not be guided based on the establishment of the predetermined driving condition. is there. The second movable piece is provided above the first movable piece, and is drivable to a second inducible state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece and in a second non-inducible state which can not be guided. is there.

  Then, when the first movable piece is driven from the first non-inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece is driven from the second non-inducible state to the second inducible state, and the first movable piece Enables the game ball to be guided to a predetermined area. Further, when the first movable piece is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece is driven from the second inducible state to the second inducible state, whereby It is possible to interrupt the guiding of the gaming ball to the predetermined area by the movable piece by the second movable piece.

  Here, normally, the gaming machine switches the first movable piece between the first inducible state and the first inducible state at a timing based on the performance related to the preset winning balls. In principle, the player's benefit from the first movable piece being in the first inducible state ends when the first movable piece starts driving to the first inducible state. However, after that, while the first movable piece is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the first movable piece causes the gaming ball to be guided to a predetermined area detected by the prize detection means and to be prized There is a case. Based on such winnings, for example, a winning ball is an unexpected profit for the player and an unexpected loss for the game arcade.

According to the present invention, when the first movable piece is driven from the first inducable state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece is driven from the second inducible state to the second inducible state. Even when the first movable piece is guiding the gaming ball to a predetermined area detected by the prize detection means at the start of driving from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, It is also possible for the second movable piece not to guide the gaming ball guided to the first movable piece to the predetermined area. Thereby, for example, even when a gaming machine that switches between the first inducible state and the first inducible state is prevented when the predetermined number of gaming balls win, it is possible to prevent exceeding the predetermined number. It becomes possible.
Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately calculate the performance of the winning balls of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game arcade.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the winning device can be driven based on the establishment of the predetermined driving condition (for example, a driving unit 517 described later) and the other end from the other It extends to the end, one end rotatably engages with the first movable piece, the other end rotatably engages with the second movable piece, and has a fulcrum between the one end and the other end An interlocking member (for example, a link member 518 described later, etc.) which is pivoted about the fulcrum by driving of the driving means at one of the one end side and the other end side, and the first movable piece When the interlocking member is rotated in a predetermined direction, it is driven from the first non-inducible state to the first inducible state, and when the interlocking member is rotated in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, Driving from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable When the interlocking member is rotated in the predetermined direction, the second inducible state is driven to the second inducible state, and the interlocking member is rotated in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. Driving from the second inducible state to the second inducible state.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable winning device further includes a driving means and an interlocking member. The drive means can be driven based on the satisfaction of a predetermined drive condition. The interlocking member extends from one end to the other end, one end rotatably engages with the first movable piece, the other end rotatably engages with the second movable piece, and between the one end and the other end And one of the one end and the other end is pivoted about the fulcrum by the drive of the driving means.
The first movable piece is driven from the first non-inducible state to the first inducible state when the interlocking member is rotated in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member is rotated in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. , Drive from the first inducible state to the first inducible state. The second movable piece is driven from the second non-inducible state to the second inducible state when the interlocking member is rotated in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member is rotated in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. , Drive from the second inducible state to the second inducible state.

  As described above, by engaging the plurality of movable pieces together with the interlocking member, for example, when one movable piece is driven by one drive unit, the other movable piece can also be driven. Further, by using the interlocking member, for example, in the case of adding a second movable piece to a gaming machine having only the first movable piece driven by the driving means, the second movable means can be provided without providing another driving means. The piece can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece. This makes it possible to easily design and replace the winning device.

  In addition, since the first movable piece and the second movable piece are interlocked by the interlocking member, for example, the first movable piece is stopped while being driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state due to a failure. If it is considered that only the first movable piece continues to pick up the gaming ball and this gaming ball is guided to a predetermined area detected by the prize detection means, it is possible to provide the second movable piece. The second movable piece can prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it becomes possible to calculate more accurately the performance regarding the winning balls of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to more accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game arcade.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine described below) including a movable part (for example, an upper left third movable prize 820 described below, etc.) driven by driving means (for example, a motor 722 described below). 1) the movable part is pivotable about a predetermined position on a first member (for example, a base member 721 or the like described later, etc. described later) to which the driving means is attached It is pivotally supported by a second member (for example, an arm member 830 or the like described later, etc.) which is pivotally supported and pivoted by the drive of the drive means, and pivotally supported by the second member so as to mesh with the first member. A first connecting member (for example, a first connecting member 724 described later, etc.), in which a contact position engaged with the first member is moved and rotated by movement of an axial center by rotation of the second member; Rotatably supported by two members, and the first connecting member and And the second connection member (for example, a second connection member 726 described later, etc.) which rotates with the rotation of the first connection member, and the first connection member attached to the first connection member, A third connection member (for example, a third connection member 840 described later, etc.) which rotates with movement, and a decorative member (for example, a rotation member) which is attached to the second connection member and rotates with the rotation of the second connection member A first arm member (for example, a second member described below, which is engaged with the driving means at the base end side and pivotally supports the first connecting member); A fourth connecting member (for example, a first arm member 831 and the like) movably engaged with the first arm member, pivotally supporting the second connecting member, and meshable with the third connecting member A second arm member (e.g., a second arm member 832 described later) having four connecting members 835 etc.); The third connection member is engaged with the fourth connection member after the decoration member is rotated from the standby position by the rotation of the second connection member, and the second connection is performed. By rotation of the member, it moves in a direction extending from the tip end side of the first arm member, and the decoration member moves in a direction in which the second arm member extends from the tip end side of the first arm member , And can be in contact with other members.

The gaming machine having such a configuration is provided with a movable part that is rotated by the drive of the drive means.
The movable part includes a first member, a second member, a first connecting member, a second connecting member, a third connecting member, and a decoration member. The first member has a drive means attached. The second member is rotatably supported by the first member about a predetermined position, and is rotated by the drive of the drive means. The first connection member is pivotally supported by the second member so as to be meshed with the first member, and the contact position meshed with the first member by the movement of the axial center by the rotation of the second member moves Rotate. The second connection member is rotatably supported by the second member, engages with the first connection member, and rotates with the rotation of the first connection member. The third connection member is attached to the first connection member, and rotates with the rotation of the first connection member. The decoration member is attached to the second connection member, and rotates with the rotation of the second connection member.
The second member has a first arm member and a second arm member. The proximal end side of the first arm member engages with the drive means to pivotally support the first connecting member. The second arm member movably engages with the first arm member, pivotally supports the second connecting member, and has a fourth connecting member capable of meshing with the third connecting member.
Then, after the decorative member is rotated from the standby position by the rotation of the second connecting member, the third connecting member meshes with the fourth connecting member, and the second connecting member rotates. 1 Move in the direction of extension from the tip side of the arm member.
In addition, the decorative member can contact another member by moving in a direction in which the second arm member extends from the tip end side of the first arm member.

  Thereby, after the decoration member is rotated by the rotation of the second connection member from the standby position, the third connection member is engaged with the fourth connection member of the second arm member, whereby the rotation of the first arm member is performed. Thus, the first connecting member and the third connecting member rotate, and the second arm member moves in the extending direction and can contact other members. Thus, after performing an effect of rotating the decoration member, the decoration member is moved to be able to contact with other members, for example, the decoration member is quickly rotated and slowly made contact with the other members. It becomes possible. Therefore, breakage of the movable part due to contact with other members can be avoided.

Also, for example, when a plurality of movable parts provided with such a decorative member are provided and interlocked with each other, each second arm member is stretched after the decorative members of the plurality of movable parts are respectively rotated. It is possible to move the decorative members in a direction by moving them in the direction. As a result, when a plurality of decorative members that do not form one design when rotating are moved in the extending direction of each second arm member, they are brought into contact with each other to form one design. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the movement of the decorative member and to improve the rendering expression by the decorative member.
Therefore, when the movable part is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by the movable part while avoiding breakage of the movable part due to the contact.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the first arm member extends in a direction in which the second arm member moves, and the rotation shaft of the second connecting member moves with the second arm member (for example, And a groove (for example, a slide groove 831a or the like described later) movably engaged with an end portion of the rotation shaft 726e or the like described later.

  Thereby, when the second arm member moves, the groove becomes a guide by moving while the end of the rotation shaft of the second connection member engages with the groove, and the decoration member attached to the second connection member It becomes possible to suppress the rocking of and move smoothly.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently managing the drive of the drive unit using the holding period and the cooling period.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the 2nd big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine which relates to the execution form 1 of this invention, Figure 4 (a) is the state where game sphere does not win in V winning a prize mouth, Figure 4 (b) Is a state in which the gaming ball wins the V winning opening. It is a schematic block diagram of the payout unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the winning ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd starting opening prize winning device of the pachinko gaming machine which relates to the deformation example 1 of execution form 1 of this invention, Figure 9 (a) shows the 2nd starting opening winning a prize device of the state which can be won It is a figure and FIG.9 (b) is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening prize winning device of the state which can not be won. FIG. 10 is a view for explaining the configuration of a game ball contact portion of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10A is a view showing the game ball contact portion of the first modification. 10 (b) is a view showing a game ball contact portion of the second modification, and FIG. 10 (c) is a view showing a game ball contact portion of the third modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd big winning device of the pachinko game machine concerning modification 1 of embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked the front decoration set of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention from the back side. It is a perspective view in the state where the front decoration set of the 2nd big winning device of the pachinko game machine concerning modification 1 of embodiment 1 of the present invention is removed. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable role of the pachinko game machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and the 4th movable role. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd connection member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the arm member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIG. 28 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA 'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB' in FIG. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 3rd connection member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable combination of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable role of the pachinko game machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and the 4th movable role. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the basic specification of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG. 34 (a) is a figure which shows a special symbol game specification table, FIG.34 (b) is a normal symbol FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a game specification table, FIG. 34 (c) is a diagram showing a hit distribution table, and FIG. 34 (d) is a diagram showing an open pattern table. It is a state transition diagram of main control of a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a state transition diagram of sub control of a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 1 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 2 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling lottery table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG. 40 (a) is a figure which shows in in the 2nd high probability, FIG. 40 (b) shows in the middle. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the no-payout time short navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit navi lottery table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the napping lottery table at the time of the set game end of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by main CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by main CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation time management process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit start interval management process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit middle process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hitting end post-process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit start interval management process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big winning a prize opening reopening waiting time management processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big winning a prize opening opening processing in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol related switch check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable member control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the subcontrol main process performed by sub CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol production start command reception processing in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing during a normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing during a normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing during a normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st high probability in-progress effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd high probability in-progress effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 3rd high probability in-progress effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 4th high probability in-progress effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of big hit start command reception in a pachinko machine concerning a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing at the time of V start command reception in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of small hit end command reception in a pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of reception of a big winning opening open display command in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing at the time of special symbol per interval interval end command reception in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by payout CPU in a pachinko machine concerning a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the security ball presence detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the security ball absence detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start-up waiting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initialization process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart showing an excitation system of a payout motor in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding reception of prize ball control data of a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding transmission of payout error information data by the payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the communication form between the main control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, and a payout control circuit. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the synthesis | combining method of the error information in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of the error information in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of origin adjustment control using a prize ball control process by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of origin adjustment retry operation after origin adjustment incompleteness using a prize ball control process by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of basic payout operation of a prize ball control processing by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the excitation data according to the drop request | requirement number in basic payout operation | movement of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart when retry operation is needed during basic payout operation of a prize ball control processing by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows the payout state alerting display apparatus in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of overpayment in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error generation | occurrence | production of the delivery ball clogging in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error generating of a lower bowl filling-up in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of a payout motor abnormality occurrence in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding reception processing of the payout control circuit at the time of a power failure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention, FIG. 110 (a) is a figure which shows in in the 2nd high probability, FIG. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lost super reach time lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation determination process in 1st high probability state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the winning ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start-up waiting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initialization process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
The structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a main body 2, a base door 3 attached to the main body 2 in an openable / closable manner, and a glass door attached to the base door 3 in an openable / closable manner. And 4.

[Body]
The main body 2 is formed of a frame-like member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 2). The main body 2 is formed of, for example, a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the base door 3 is pivoted around one side edge of the main body 2 as an axis. The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3 a. The opening 3 a is formed from the vicinity of the central portion of the base door 3 to the upper area, and is formed to have a size that occupies most of the base door 3.

  In addition, the speaker 11, the game board 12, the liquid crystal display device 13, the dish unit 14, the launcher 15, the payout unit 16, and the substrate unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

  The speaker 11 is disposed at the upper portion (near the upper end portion) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and is disposed to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is formed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transparency. As the resin having light transmittance, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin or the like may be used.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a game area 12a is formed in which the game balls fired from the launch device 15 roll. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by the guide rails 41 (specifically, the outer rails 41a shown in FIG. 3 described later), and the outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

  Furthermore, in the game area 12a, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 3 described later) are inserted. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 3 described later.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13 a is set to a size that occupies the whole or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an identification pattern for effect, an effect image, and an image for decoration (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 through the game board 12.

  Although the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. As the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, display devices such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

  Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back of the game board 12 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). A space is formed which is a flow path of the game ball rolling on the game area 12a.

  The spacer 19 is formed of a light transmitting material. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, For example, one part may be formed with the material which has light transmittance, and may be formed with the material which does not have light transmittance. .

  The tray unit 14 is disposed below the gaming board 12. The tray unit 14 has an upper tray 21 and a lower tray 22 disposed below the upper tray 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 22 are respectively formed with a payout opening 21a and a payout opening 22a for lending game balls and paying out (winning balls) the game balls.

  When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the gaming balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a and the payout opening 22a, and are stored in the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 22, respectively. In addition, the game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are fired by the launcher 15 to the game area 12 a.

  Further, the dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. Specifically, the effect button 23 is mounted on the upper tray 21. Further, a dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is rotatably attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display of the liquid crystal display device 13 is performed. In the area 13a, an image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launcher 15 includes a launch handle 25 operable by the player and a panel 26 engaged with the lower right portion of the tray unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the back side of the panel body 26, a solenoid actuator (drive device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided. Similarly, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a touch sensor is provided at the periphery of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25 to change the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. That is, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25. Then, when it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25, the solenoid actuator can launch the game ball.

  Then, when the player grips the firing handle 25 and rotates in the clockwise direction (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the firing volume changes according to the pivot angle of the firing handle 25 Power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 are sequentially fired, and the launched gaming balls are guided to the guide rails 41 (see FIG. 3 described later) and released to the gaming area 12 a of the gaming board 12.

  Also, although shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the side of the firing handle 25 is provided with a firing stop button. The firing stop button is a button provided to stop the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. Even when the release handle 25 is held by the player and turned, the release of the game ball is stopped by the player pressing the release stop button.

  The dispensing unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are disposed on the back side of the base door 3. The game unit is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 22 from among the gaming balls supplied from the storage unit, based on the fulfillment of the payout conditions.

  The substrate unit 17 has various control substrates. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like described later (see FIG. 33 described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is comprised by the plate-shaped member whose surface is a substantially square shape. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. A speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11 on the front surface of the glass door 4.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in an area of the game board 12 facing the game area 12a. The opening of the glass door 4 is attached with a protective glass 28 having light transparency, whereby the opening is closed.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board.

  On the front of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting opening 44, a second starting opening 45 (starting area), and an ordinary electric role 46 And are provided. Also, on the front of the game board 12, there are a plurality of general winning openings 51 and 52, a first major winning device 54 (variable winning device), a second major winning device 53 (variable winning device), and a plurality of out-ports 55 Game nails 56 are provided.

  Furthermore, on the front of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means) and an ordinary symbol display are provided in the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 disposed substantially in the center. A device 62, a normal symbol hold display 63, a first special symbol hold display 64, and a second special symbol hold display 65 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) which lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED which displays the number of rounds in the big hit game, etc. are provided. It is also good.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 is configured of an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape partitioning the gaming area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape disposed on the inner side (inner circumferential side) of the outer rail 41a. Be done.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged to face each other near the left end of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launcher is disposed between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c is formed which guides the game ball fired by the camera 15 to the top of the game area 12a.

  Further, at the end of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge opening 41d is formed by the end of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a opposed thereto. A ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the end of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball outlet 41d.

  The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game balls discharged from the ball discharge opening 41 d to the game area 12 a from passing through the ball discharge opening 41 d again and entering the guide path 41 c.

  The gaming balls discharged from the ball discharge opening 41d flow downward from the top of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. Flow down from the top to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13 b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13 a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the gaming ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the gaming area 12a.

  The ball passing detector 43 is disposed near the right end of the display area 13a as viewed from the player. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passage ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting gaming balls passing through the ball passage detector 43. Further, by the game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether it is a "hit" or not, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first start opening 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start opening 45 is disposed below the first start opening 44. The first starting opening 44 and the second starting opening 45 are formed of members capable of receiving gaming balls.

  Hereinafter, the fact that the gaming ball enters or passes through the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, three game balls are paid out when winning in the first start opening 44, and two game balls are paid out when winning in the second start opening 45. The game balls to be paid out are called prize balls.

In addition, by the game ball entering the first starting opening 44, the lottery whether or not it is either "big hit" and "small hit" is performed, the variation of the special symbol based on the result of the lottery Display starts. By the game ball entering the second starting opening 45, a lottery of whether it is "big hit" or "small hit" is performed, and the variation display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery Be done. In the first embodiment, the probability of winning a "small hit" when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 44 is zero. That is, even if the ball enters the first starting opening 44, it does not win a "small hit". In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 45, the player wins the "small hit" with a higher probability than the probability of winning the "big hit". That is, when entering the second starting opening 45, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit".
In the first embodiment, as described above, the probability of winning a "small hit" when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 44 is zero, but it is not limited to zero. This probability may be a probability lower than the probability of winning a "small hit" when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 45. As described above, even if the game ball enters the first starting opening 44, the game can be expanded by having the possibility of winning a "small hit". For example, it is possible to shift to a set game to be described later from other than the “time-saving game state” described later, and the range of games can be expanded.

  The first starting opening 44 is provided with a first starting opening winning ball switch 44 a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting opening 44. In addition, the second starting opening 45 is provided with a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 45. In addition, the game ball which won the 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 passes the collection opening (not shown) provided in the game board 12, and is conveyed to the collection part (not shown) of the gaming ball. Be done.

  The ordinary motor-operated part 46 is provided at the second start port 45. The ordinary electric combination 46 includes a pair of wing-shaped members rotatably mounted on both sides of the second starting port 45, and a common electric combination solenoid 46a for driving the pair of wing-like members (described later) 33).

  The ordinary electric character 46 is driven by the ordinary electric character solenoid 46a to expand the pair of wing-like members to facilitate winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 45, and the pair of wing-like The member is closed to cause the second starting opening 45 to generate one of the closed states in which the game ball can not be won.

  In the first embodiment, when the ordinary motorized jack 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of wing-shaped members is not a mode that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes winning a game ball difficult. You may

  The general winning opening 51 is disposed near the lower left portion of the game area 12a as viewed from the player. The general winning opening 52 is disposed below the ball passage detector 43, and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a as viewed from the player.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members capable of receiving game balls. In the following, the game ball entering or passing through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When the game ball is won in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are ten winning balls each when winning in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball switch 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a gaming ball that has won the general winning opening 51. In addition, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball switch 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 52.

  The first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 are disposed below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting opening 44 and the general winning opening 52. The first big prize device 54 and the second big prize device 53 are disposed vertically along the flow path of the game ball, and the second big prize device 53 is disposed above the first big prize device 54. Ru.

  The first big winning device 54 is a so-called attacking type opening / closing device, and has an openable shutter 54a and a solenoid actuator (first big winning opening solenoid 54b in FIG. 33 described later) for driving the shutter.

  The first winning device 54 receives the game ball when the corresponding shutter 54a is open (opened state: first state), and the shutter 54a is closed (closed state: second state) At the time of the game ball is not accepted.

  In the following, the game ball entering or passing through the first big prize device 54 is also referred to as "winning". When the game ball wins the first big prize device 54, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, in the case where the gaming ball has won in the first large winning device 54, there are 15 winning balls.

  Further, the first big prize device 54 is provided with a count switch 54 c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the gaming balls that have won the first big prize device 54.

  The second big winning device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a configuration of a second big winning device for a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4 (a) shows a state where the gaming ball does not win a V winning opening, and FIG. 4 (b) shows a state where the gaming ball wins a V winning opening. The second big winning device 53 has a wing member 53a that can be opened and closed. When the wing member 53a is in the open state, the second big winning device 53 receives the game ball, and the wing member 53a is in the closed state (FIG. 3). Do not accept the game ball at the time of reference). That is, when the wing member 53a is in the open state, the gaming ball may enter the second big winning device 53, and when the wing member 53a is in the closing state, the gaming ball may enter the second big winning device 53. Absent.

  Hereinafter, the game ball entering the second big prize device 53 is also referred to as "winning". When the game ball wins the second big prize device 53, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are 15 winning balls also when the second big winning device 53 has a game ball.

  Furthermore, a V winning opening 57 is provided inside the second big winning device 53. The second big winning device 53 has a movable member 57 a that can be opened and closed to open and close the V winning opening 57. When the V prize opening 57 is in the open state, the V prize opening 57 accepts the game ball, and when the V prize opening 57 is in the closed state, the V prize opening 57 does not accept the game ball. The game ball entering the V winning opening 57 is referred to as "V winning". In addition, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is "per V".

  The timing at which the movable member 57a is in the open state is related to the timing at which the blade member 53a is in the open state. For example, both the blade member 53a and the movable member 57a are normally in the closed state. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the movable member 57a may be in the open state simultaneously with or slightly after that, and the movable member 57a may be in the closed state before the blade member 53a is in the closed state. For example, the time during which the blade member 53a is in the open state may be twice as long as the time during which the movable member 57a is in the open state.

  Further, the second large winning device 53 is provided with a count switch 53 c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the gaming balls that have won the second large winning device 53. Further, the V winning opening 57 is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the V winning opening 57. In addition, the second starting opening 45 is provided with a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 45. Furthermore, the second big winning device 53 has a V winning opening solenoid 57b for operating the movable member 57a.

  The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. A game in which the out opening 55 does not win any of the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the general winning opening 51, the general winning opening 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 I accept the ball.

  When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. 3, when the game ball is hit in the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when hit right) The game ball is induced near the second starting opening 45 located below the first starting opening 44 by the game nail 56 or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting opening 44. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the first starting opening 44 is won, the "small hit" is not won. In the first embodiment, when the second starting opening 45 is won, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit".

  Therefore, in the "time saving game state" described later in which winning to the second starting opening 45 is relatively easy, the possibility of winning to the first starting opening 44 is reduced by performing a right-handed hit, the second The possibility of winning on the starting opening 45 can be increased to make it easy to win a "small hit".

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is disposed substantially at the center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) a special symbol in a special symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol by a symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display device 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs variable display of the special symbol (identification information), triggered by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the change display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the special symbol.

Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. Also, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as a second special symbol. Note that whether the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined by the displayed color. That is, the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in different colors in the case of the first special symbol and the case of the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is displayed, it is displayed in red, and when the second special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in green. This makes it possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed.
In the first embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 has one digit. For example, the special symbol display device 61 has two digits, and the left digit (ten's digit) is the first special symbol, and the right digit (one digit) Even if the order is to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to distinguish which special symbol is displayed even if the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are different colors. it can.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state It shifts to the big hit game state which is a state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is a "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of shifting to the big hit gaming state. Further, in the special symbol display device 61, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in the form of "small hit", the blade member 53a is in the open state. As described above, even if the first starting opening 44 is won, it does not win the "small hit".

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big prize device 54 is opened. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the gaming ball is prized in the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. When it is determined, the first big prize device 54 is in the open state.

  The open state of the first big prize device 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Further, there are a plurality of types in the jackpot gaming state, the opening time of the first big winning device 54 is not constant, and varies depending on each type. When the elapsed period of the open state of the first big winning device 54 satisfies any one of these conditions, the big winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

  In the following, a game in which the first big prize device 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept the game ball is called a round game. During the round game, the first winning device 54 is closed.

  In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61 and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the gaming state is shifted or maintained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning The display (hold ball) is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the held first special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be suspended (so-called "number of suspended balls (number of balls for suspension)") is specified at a maximum of four times.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held second special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be suspended (the number of suspended items) is specified at a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved variable designs for special symbols is eight in total.

  In the first embodiment, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one of the special symbols is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. . In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol are mixed, you may make it perform the fluctuation display of a special symbol in the held order. The second special symbol may not be put on hold.

[Normal symbol display device]
The normal symbol display device 62 is disposed substantially at the center of the upper portion of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, as shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 as viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in a normal symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern configured by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is indicated as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on / off the two normal symbol display LEDs in response to the game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43, and performs the variation display of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the normal symbol.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "hit"), the normal motorized role 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal motorized role 46 maintains the closed state. In the first embodiment, in the case where the normal symbol is in the form of a “hit”, the operation of the normal motorized component 46 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state is performed three consecutive times. Also, the open time is 1.5 seconds.

  Moreover, the lottery in the normal symbol game has a high probability in the "time-saving game state", and has a low probability in other cases. In the first embodiment, in the case of the low probability, there is no winning, and in the case of the high probability, the winning is all. In this case, in the case of the low probability, random numbers may be acquired but not selected, and in the case of the low probability, the drawing itself may not be performed.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric character 46 operates according to the result.

  When the gaming ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed at present, the variable display of the normal symbol whose variable display is suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of normal symbols to be suspended (that is, the "number of suspended units") is specified to a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol holding display device 63 is, as shown in FIG. 3, a display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.
Placed approximately in the middle of In the first embodiment, the normal symbol holding display device 63 is disposed below the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62.

  The normal symbol holding display device 63 is a device for displaying the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, in the normal symbol holding display device 63, the number of holdings of variable symbols of normal symbols is displayed by turning on / off each normal symbol holding display LED.

  Specifically, when the number of pending variable symbols of normal symbols is one, the normal symbol suspension indicator LED (the first ordinary symbol suspension indicator LED from the left) located at the leftmost position seen from the player side Lights up and the other normal symbol hold display LED goes out.

  In the case where the number of held variable display of normal symbols is two, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left light, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs turn off. In the case where the number of held variable display of normal symbols is 3, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left light and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are extinguished. And, in the case where the number of pending variable display of normal symbols is four, all the normal symbol holding display LEDs are lit.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is disposed on the left of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the first special symbol being held (the holding ball of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a first special symbol hold number display unit 64 a and a first special symbol hold information display unit 64 b.

  The first special symbol hold information display unit 64b is disposed to the left of the special symbol display device 61, and the first special symbol hold number display unit 64a is disposed to the left of the first special symbol hold information display unit 64b. Be done.

  The first special symbol hold number display unit 64a has four LEDs (first special symbol hold indication LED) arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the display mode of the 1st special symbol holding number display part 64a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol holding display device 63.

  That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being held, the first special symbol holding indication LED from the first special symbol holding indication LED located from the first special symbol holding indication LED located from the player side to the number of holdings as seen from the player side Lights up.

  In addition, the first special symbol hold information display unit 64b displays information on the hold ball of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol holding information display unit 64b displays information (identification information) related to the holding ball of the first special symbol to be variably displayed next by a symbol made of numerals, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3 and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol. .

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is disposed on the right side of the normal symbol display device 62 as viewed from the player on the upper side of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device for displaying information on the variable display of the second special symbol being held (the holding ball of the second special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is configured by a second special symbol hold number display unit 65 a and a second special symbol hold information display unit 65 b.

  The second special symbol hold information display unit 65b is disposed to the right of the normal symbol display device 62, and the second special symbol hold number display unit 65a is disposed to the right of the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b. Be done.

  The 2nd special symbol reservation number display part 65a has 4 LED (2nd special symbol suspension display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the display mode of the 2nd special symbol hold number display part 65a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display apparatus 63. FIG.

  That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being held, the second special symbol holding indication LED from the second special symbol holding indication LED located at the leftmost position to the number of holdings as seen from the player side Lights up.

  In addition, the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b displays information on the holding ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the second special symbol to be variably displayed next by a symbol made of numerals, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3 and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of pending variable displays of the second special symbol. .

[Liquid crystal display device]
As described above, the liquid crystal display device 13 is made of liquid crystal, and performs various effects in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the effect image associated with the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. Under the present circumstances, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of effect identification symbols (for example, decoration (decor The symbol is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as liquid crystal symbol alignment eyes described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, if the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display device 61 in the stop display is a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the player is made to know that it is a "big hit". An effect image is displayed on the display area 13a.

  As an effect for making a player know that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged along a predetermined direction) Then, there is an effect such as displaying an image notifying "big hit".

  Further, in the first embodiment, an effect image associated with the display content of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. For example, in the display area 13a, holding information (for example, a holding symbol having the same number as the holding number) for displaying the holding number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. In addition, when performing what is called a pre-reading effect which is a well-known technology based on the information of the holding ball of a special symbol, the advance notice at this time may be displayed on the display area 13a.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62 is the predetermined aspect, the effect image for making the player grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 You may further provide the function to make it.

[Informal production]
Although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, by satisfying a certain condition, the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, and the notification about the gaming state executed when the "V hit" is obtained, It is executed when the player wins a small hit that triggers this "per v". This notification is performed by displaying the effect image in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Thereby, the player can perform an advantageous gaming state by performing a firing operation of the gaming ball based on the notification. Specifically, depending on the content of the notification, a firing operation is performed such that the gaming ball enters the second big winning device 53 so as to be “per-V”, or the second is not to be “per-V”. It is possible to perform a firing operation so that the game ball does not enter the big winning device 53.

[Schematic Configuration of Dispensing Unit]
Next, the dispensing unit 16 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a view showing the entire configuration of the payout unit 16, and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the back side. Moreover, FIG. 6 is a figure which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit 170 as a payment apparatus mentioned later.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the payout unit 16 is supplied with gaming balls from a storage unit (not shown) at the top of the gaming machine, and a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank for storing the supplied game balls, The ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 to communicate with the tank 161 and the game balls can be managed to be paid out to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, ie, the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 22, etc. And an award ball case unit 170.

  In addition, a substrate unit 17 in which various control boards including a payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is disposed below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 in parallel with the winning ball case unit 170. .

  Here, the storage unit (not shown) described above is, for example, a replenishment device as an accessory facility of a hall (game hall) installed to supply game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the gaming balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 and are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the winning ball case unit 170 is provided with a first starting opening 44, a second starting opening 45, and a general winning opening 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the gaming area 12a (see FIG. 3) described above. On the condition that the gaming ball has won in any of the general winning opening 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53, the gaming ball is paid out from the inside of the ball tank 161 to the payout passage 180 described later is there. The dispensing passage 180 is disposed at the lowermost part of the winning ball case unit 170.

  The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball collateral switch 172A as a replenishment detection means, and a first sprocket 173A as a movement means. Here, although the winning ball case unit 170 is omitted in FIG. 6 except for a part, it is identical to the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A and the first sprocket 173A described above. The second ball supply passage 171B, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B, and the second sprocket 173B as moving means are disposed on the back side in the paper surface direction (the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of FIG. There is.

  In other words, the winning ball case unit 170 has a structure in which the ball supply passage 171, the 15 ball security switch 172 and the sprocket 173 are provided in two rows.

  However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are disposed out of phase with each other by 60 °. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as “ball supply passage 171”, and the first 15-ball-secured switch 172A and The two 15-ball collateral switches 172B are collectively referred to as "15-ball collateral switches 172", and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are collectively referred to as "sprockets 173".

  Also, the dispensing passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first dispensing passage 180A and a second dispensing passage 180B. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first dispensing passage 180A and the second dispensing passage 180B are collectively referred to as “dispensing passage 180”.

  The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and gaming balls are supplied from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a specified number (15 in the first embodiment) of gaming balls supplied from the ball tank 161. In actuality, since the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B have a two-row structure, a total of 30 game balls can be stored in these passages.

  The 15-ball collateral switch 172 is for detecting gaming balls supplied into the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball is being replenished by detecting the ball detection shield plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b each time the game ball is replenished (passed). Do.

  Therefore, when the number of gaming balls stored in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15 balls, the ball detection shield plate 172a is actuated and deviates from the detection area of the detection sensor 172b. It is detected that the specified number (15 in the first embodiment) has not been accumulated.

  Further, while detecting that the gaming ball is being replenished, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is in the ON state. In addition, in FIG. 6, the state which is detecting the gaming ball with which 15 ball security switch 172 was replenished is shown.

  In addition, the 15 ball security switch 172 is in the ON state while detecting that the gaming ball supplied into the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15 ball security switch 172. “The game ball is replenished” means that the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball is present in the ball supply passage 171. Then, on the premise that the gaming balls are in series, it is included that the specified number of gaming balls in the ball supply passage 171 is secured.

  The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a drive unit constituted by a stepping motor, and rotates in the clockwise direction in the drawing according to the drive of the payout motor 174 described later. Sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in ball supply passage 171 one ball at a time, rotates by driving payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and moves one ball at a time to payout passage 180, that is, pays out It has become.

  In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 is rotated by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, it becomes a rotation that can receive the game balls stored in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, It is also possible to include a mode dependent on the rotation of the dispensing motor 174.

  In other words, the sprocket 173 can rotate so as to accept one ball at a time by the payout motor 174 and can also be expressed as paying out one ball at a time. As a result of the predetermined rotation of the payout motor 174, one sprocket ball 173 results. It can be expressed as accepting and paying out one ball at a time.

  Further, the sprocket 173 is assumed to rotate, but is not limited to this, and the sprocket 173 is in the form of a plate, and it is a sliding type movable or driven parallel or perpendicular to the dispensing passage 180 The shape of the sprocket 173 may be any shape as long as a predetermined number of gaming balls are received and paid out.

  The payout motor 174 is common to the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the first embodiment constitute gaming ball control means and payout means capable of moving the gaming ball having passed through the ball supply passage 171.

  In addition, a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B are provided in the first dispensing passage 180A and the second dispensing passage 180B, respectively. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 181".

  The counting switch 181 is for detecting the gaming balls paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the first embodiment constitutes a payout detection unit.

  In the vicinity of the top of the ball supply passage 171, a ball removing shutter 175 is provided. When the ball release shutter 175 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the figure, the ball supply passage 171 is opened, and gaming balls accumulated in the upper portion of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball removing shutter 175 is normally locked, and is used, for example, when discharging the game balls stored in the ball tank 161.

Modification 1 of Embodiment 1
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in the game board 120 or the game board 120 described below in addition to or in place of the structure provided on the game board 12 or the game board 12 of the first embodiment. A configuration can be provided.

  FIG. 7 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. Here, the player faces the game area 120a of the game board 120 described later to play a game. In the description of the game board 120, "front side" means the player side (front side shown in FIG. 8), and "back side" means the opposite side to the player (back side shown in FIG. 8) Means to be Also, "right" means that it is right as viewed from the player (viewed from the front side shown in FIG. 8), and "left" is viewed from the player as shown (the front side shown in FIG. It means that it is the left.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 120 according to the first modification is disposed on the front side, and a panel main body 500 in which a panel opening 500 a is formed and a center fitted to the panel opening 500 a of the panel main 500. A base plate 600 and a rear box 700 disposed on the back side of the panel main body 500 are provided.

  The panel main body 500 has a game area 120a in which game balls can be rolled on the front, and a second starting opening winning device 510 is provided below the panel opening 500a in the game area 120a.

  The center base plate 600 is formed in an annular shape, and a game area 120 a which is continuous with the game area 120 a of the panel body 500 is formed. In the center base plate 600, a second winning device 610 is provided in the game area 120a, and a first movable part 620 movable inside the ring shape is provided.

  In the rear box 700, a substantially rectangular box opening 700a is formed at a position overlapping the panel opening 500a of the panel body 500, and a second movable part 710 is provided below the box opening 700a, and the box opening Four third movable movable objects (upper left third movable movable object 720, upper right third movable movable object 730, lower left third movable movable object 740, lower right third movable character 750) in the vicinity of the four corners of the part 700a A fourth movable character 760 is provided above the box opening 700a.

  The second starting opening winning device 510, the second big winning device 610, the first movable role 620, the second movable role 710, the third movable role (upper left third movable role 720, upper right third movable role 730 The lower left third movable part 740, the lower right third movable part 750) or the fourth movable part 760 will be described as a configuration provided on the game board 120 of the first modification of the first embodiment, but The configuration can be provided at any position of any of the pachinko gaming machines 1 of the first to fourth embodiments.

(Second start port winning device of modification 1)
FIG. 9 is a view for explaining the configuration of a second starting opening prize winning device for a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. It is a figure which shows a prize-winning apparatus, FIG.9 (b) is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening prize-winning apparatus of the state which can not be prize-winning. FIG. 9 is a side view of the second starting opening winning device.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the second starting opening winning device 510 as a winning device, a game ball rolling on the game area 120a can enter and an opening for a winning device formed in the panel main body 500 A front decoration 511 arranged on the front side of the 500 b, an entrance 512 capable of entering a game ball formed between the front decoration 511 and the panel main body 500 and rolling on the game area 120 a, an electric chew unit 513 And. The electric chew unit 513 includes a prize detection means 514, a first movable piece 515, and a second movable piece 516 inside a second starting opening prize box (not shown) fixed to the back of the panel main body 500. A drive unit 517 and a link member 518 as an interlocking member are provided.

  The prize detection means 514 can detect that the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance 512 has passed the predetermined area 514a. The winning detection means 514 is provided with a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later).

  The first movable piece 515 is slidably provided on the front side or the back side in a second starting opening prize box (not shown) below the ball entry port 512. In the first movable piece 515, a predetermined drive condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a "hit" mode)) Based on the first guidance possible state (the state shown in FIG. 9A) capable of guiding the gaming ball to the predetermined area 514a of the prize detection means 514 and the first guidance impossible state (not shown). And (d) can be driven. In addition, in the special symbol display device 61 shown in FIG. 3, establishment of the predetermined drive condition may be a case where the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of “hit”). In addition, second starting opening winning device 510 is one example of the winning device, among the winning devices having the same configuration as the second starting opening winning device 510, that the game ball is detected by the winning detection means 514 is a normal symbol In the case of the start condition of, this winning device functions as a winning opening with the ordinary electric role, when it is the start condition of the special symbol that the game ball is detected by the winning detection means 514 The winning device functions as a winning opening having a special motorized role.

  The first movable piece 515 is continuous with the guiding surface 515a for guiding the gaming ball in the direction of the winning detection means 514 and the guiding surface 515a, extends upward and inclines to the front side, and protrudes to the front side in the first inducible state. And a ball receiving surface 515b.

  The second movable piece 516 is located below the ball entry port 512 and above the first movable piece 515 (upper side in FIG. 9A) on the front face of the second starting hole prize box (not shown). It is provided slidably on the side or the back side. In the second movable piece 516, a predetermined drive condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a "hit" mode)) From the second non-inducible condition (the condition shown in FIG. 9B) to the second movable condition (FIG. 9A) in which the gaming ball can be guided to the first movable piece 515. Can be driven).

  The second movable piece 516 includes a game ball contact portion 516a that contacts the gaming ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b of the first movable piece 515 and does not contact the gaming ball in contact with the guiding surface 515a of the first movable piece 515. . That is, the distance between the lower end of the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516 (a portion closest to the first movable piece 515 in the game ball contact portion 516a) and the guiding surface 515a of the first movable piece 515 is , The diameter of the game ball is about the same size.

  FIG. 10 is a view for explaining the configuration of the gaming ball abutment portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10A shows the gaming ball abutment portion of the first modification. FIG. 10 (b) is a view showing a game ball contact portion of the modification 2. FIG. 10 (c) is a view showing a game ball contact portion of the modification 3. FIG. 10 is a side view of the gaming ball contact portion.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the gaming ball contact portion 516a of the first modification is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516, extends downward, and the front surface is a vertical surface, In the surface on the back side, an inclined surface 516a 'is formed to be inclined from the back side to the front side toward the lower end. Thus, by forming the inclined surface 516a 'on the surface on the back side, for example, the second movable piece 516 can move up and down slightly, and the second inducible state (state shown in FIG. 9A) When driven to the second non-inductable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to ride over the gaming ball rolling the first movable piece 515 on the back side than the gaming ball contact portion 516a (prize detection means 514 (Refer to FIG. 9) It becomes easy to guide in the opposite direction).

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the game ball contact portion 516b of the second modification is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516A, extends downward, and faces the lower end of the front surface. An inclined surface 516b 'is formed to be inclined from the front side to the back side, and the surface on the back side is a vertical surface. Thus, by forming the inclined surface 516b 'on the surface on the front side, for example, the second movable piece 516A can be moved up and down in the vertical direction, and the second inducible state (state shown in FIG. 9A) When driven to the second non-inductable state (the state shown in FIG. 9 (b)), the game ball rolling over the first movable piece 515 can be easily overcome on the front side of the game ball contact portion 516b (prize detection means It becomes easy to guide in the direction of 514 (see FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the gaming ball contact portion 516c of the third modification is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516B, extends downward, and faces the lower end on the front side. An inclined surface 516b 'that inclines from the front side to the back side is formed, and an inclined surface 516a' that inclines from the back side to the front side toward the lower end is formed on the back side. As described above, by forming the inclined surface 516b 'in the surface on the front side and forming the inclined surface 516a' in the surface on the back side, the above-described modification of the operation and effect of the inclined surface 516a 'of the above modification 1 can be obtained. The effect of the second inclined surface 516b 'is added, the return of the game ball becomes more fluid, and the effect of the game ball can be improved.

  The driving means 517 is, for example, a solenoid and is provided on the back side of the second movable piece 516, and a predetermined driving condition is established for the piston 517a connected in the vicinity of the rear end of the second movable piece 516 For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the predetermined end condition is established by pulling back to the back side based on the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state (in the case of the “hit”). (For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, it is pushed out to the front side based on the case where a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal symbol stopped and displayed becomes a predetermined mode (a mode of “hit”). The driving means 517 may be provided behind the first movable piece 515, and a piston 517a may be connected in the vicinity of the rear end of the first movable piece 515.

  The link member 518 extends from one end to the other end, one end rotatably engages with the first movable piece 515, and the other end rotatably engages with the second movable piece 516, one end and the other end A fulcrum 518a is provided between the sides, and the other end and one end are pivoted about the fulcrum 518a by the drive of the drive means 517.

  In this manner, the first movable member 515 and the second movable member 516 are engaged with one end side and the other end side of the link member 518, and the link member 518 is rotated about the fulcrum 518a, thereby achieving the first movable member. When the piece 515 is driven from the first non-inducable state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second non-inducible state to the second inducible state, and the first movable piece 515 The sphere can be guided to the predetermined area 514a. In addition, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second inducible state to the second inducible state. The second movable piece 516 can block the guiding of the gaming ball to the predetermined area 514a by the one movable piece 515.

  Specifically, the drive means 517 pulls the piston 517a to the back side based on the satisfaction of the predetermined drive condition. Then, the link member 518 is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first non-inducable state to the first inducible state, and the second movable piece 516 is in the second non-inducible state. It drives to the state which can be guided, and it will be in the state shown to Fig.9 (a).

  On the other hand, the driving means 517 pushes the piston 517a to the front side based on the satisfaction of the predetermined end condition. Then, the link member 518 is pivoted in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, and the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second inducible state. It drives to a 2nd non-guided state, and it will be in the state shown in FIG.9 (b).

  At this time, among the gaming balls in contact with the first movable piece 515, the gaming balls having flowed down to the guiding surface 515a are guided to the predetermined area 514a without coming into contact with the gaming ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516. The gaming ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b abuts on the gaming ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516, and the guiding to the predetermined area 514a is blocked.

  According to the second starting opening winning device 510 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are achieved. According to the second starting opening prize winning device 510, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second inducible state to the second induction. In order to drive to the impossible state, the first movable piece 515 guides the gaming ball to a predetermined area detected by the prize detection means 514 at the start of driving from the first inducible state to the first inducible state. Even in the middle of the game, the second movable piece 516 can not guide the gaming ball guided to the first movable piece 515 to a predetermined area. Thereby, for example, even when a gaming machine that switches between the first inducible state and the first inducible state is prevented when the predetermined number of gaming balls win, it is possible to prevent exceeding the predetermined number. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately calculate the performance of the winning balls of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game arcade.

  Further, by engaging the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 together with the link member 518, for example, if one movable piece is driven by one drive means 517, the other movable piece is also driven. be able to. Further, by using the link member 518, for example, when adding the second movable piece 516 to a gaming machine having only the first movable piece 515 driven by the drive means 517, without providing another drive means, The second movable piece 516 can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece 515. This makes it possible to easily design and replace the winning device.

  Further, since the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are interlocked by the link member 518, for example, the first movable piece 515 is switched from the first inducible state to the first inducible state due to a failure. When stopping while driving, if only the first movable piece 515 continues to pick up the gaming ball, it is conceivable that this gaming ball is guided to a predetermined area detected by the prize detection means 514, but the second movable By providing the piece 516, the second movable piece 516 can prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it becomes possible to calculate more accurately the performance regarding the winning balls of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to more accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game arcade.

(Second big prize device of modification 1)
FIG. 11 is a view for explaining the configuration of a second winning combination device of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The second big winning device 610 as a variable winning device includes a front decoration set 611, a V shutter 612 as a first movable member, and a plurality of right prize ball sensors 613 and left prize ball sensors 614 as first passage detecting means. And a V winning sensor 616 as a second passage detection means, and a discharge sensor 617 as a third passage detection means. In the following description, the second big winning device 610 will be described as a second big winning device, but the configuration similar to that of the second big winning device 610 is not limited to this, as a first big winning device and a starting opening. The present invention can be applied to a starting opening device of the present invention, a general winning opening device as a general winning opening, and the like. Further, for example, when the same configuration as the second big winning device 610 is applied to the starting opening device, the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) or the second starting instead of the V winning sensor 616. A mouth winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided. Further, for example, when the same configuration as that of the second big winning device 610 is applied to the general winning opening device, a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided instead of the V winning sensor 616.

  The front decoration set 611 is provided on the front side of the center plate 600 and in the game area 120a. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the front decoration set of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side.

  The front decoration set 611 has a front plate 611a disposed at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 11), a side wall 611b extending from the center base plate 600 to the front plate 611a, and a side wall at the top A specific area 611c where the V shutter 612 (see FIG. 11) is disposed without the provision of the 611b, and the V shutter 612 and the right ball sensor 613 (shown in FIG. 11) and a contact member 611d).

  A gaming ball can pass between the protruding end of the contact member 611 d and the front surface of the center base plate 600. The contact member 611 d can contact the gaming ball having passed through the specific area 611 c. Further, the contact member 611 d is provided in the range of the substantially right half of the specific area 611 c. Although details will be described later, a right prize ball sensor 613 is provided on the lower right side of the specific area 611c, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is provided on the lower left side of the specific area 611c. That is, the contact member 611 d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614.

  Further, the front decoration set 611 is a space formed by the distributing portion 611e formed by the side wall 611b, the front plate 611a and the side wall 611b below the specific area 611c, and guides the gaming ball having passed through the specific area 611c. , And a second guide passage 611g and a third guide passage 611h.

  The first guide passage 611 f, which is an example of the predetermined area, is provided between the V-bello 615 and the V prize sensor 616. In the first guide passage 611f, there is disposed a decelerating portion 611j capable of reducing the rolling speed of the gaming ball passing through the first guide passage 611f. Here, in the present embodiment, the deceleration portion 611 j is provided between the V-bello 615 and the V prize sensor 616, and before the gaming ball having passed the first guide passage 611 f reaches the V prize sensor 616. Is a member having a function of attenuating (decelerating) the rolling speed of the game ball, and if it has such a function, its shape may be a rib, a curved passage or the like. That is, the deceleration portion 611 j is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment as long as it has a function of attenuating the rolling speed of the rolling game ball, and, for example, forward from the gaming board 12 The rolling direction of the game ball formed in the game area 120a where the rib which protrudes, the rib which protrudes toward the game board 12 from the front plate 611a of the front decoration set 611, and the second big winning device 610 is It can be set as arbitrary structures, such as a structure which contains a guideway (curved part) which can be guided, a windmill, and a distribution valve. By temporarily lowering the rolling speed of the gaming ball in such a deceleration portion 611j, it is possible to concentrate the player's awareness on the gaming ball, and thereafter to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player. Since this gaming ball passes through the winning sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect on the gaming ball passing through the V prize sensor 616. In addition, in the first guide passage 611f, a passage projecting portion which protrudes from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600 and extends along the first guide passage 611f and can be contacted by the game balls flowing down the first guide passage 611f. 611k is provided. By providing such a passage projection 611k, the gaming ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f flows down while contacting the passage projection 611k in the first guide passage 611f, as compared with the case of simply flowing down, The movement is more complicated, and the effect of the game ball is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution unit 611 e is formed in a mountain shape that inclines downward to the left and right with the approximate center in the left-right direction as the vertex. The first guide passage 611f extends downward from the hem of one of the distribution units 611e (left side in FIG. 12), and the V-bello 615 is disposed in the middle portion. The second guide passage 611g extends downward from the hem of the other (right side in FIG. 12) of the distribution unit 611e. One end of the third guide passage 611h is connected to the upper end of the V guide 615 of the first guide passage 611f, and the third guide passage 611h is inclined downward, and the other end is connected to the second guide passage 611g. The front decoration set 611 is formed of a transparent material, and can visually recognize a part of the gaming balls guided by at least the first guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, and the third guide passage 611h.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a state where the front decoration set of the second big winning device for a pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is removed. The V shutter 612 is slid to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (a second large winning opening solenoid 53b in FIG. 33 described later). The V shutter 612 is disposed in the specific area 611c (see FIG. 11), slides to the back side, and in a state of being retracted from the front face of the center base plate 600, the gaming ball easily passes the specific area 611c (first state ( In the open state, the slide movement to the front side is made, and in the state where it protrudes from the front face of the center base plate 600, the gaming ball is in the second state (closed state) which is difficult to pass through the specific area 611c. Further, the V-shutter 612 is inclined downward from one side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side in the example shown in FIG. 11) to the other side (for example, the right side in the example shown in FIG. There is.

  The right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged in parallel at substantially the same height in the left-right direction in the gaming area 120 a, and provided with a count switch 53 c (see FIG. 33 described later). When it is in the first state, it is possible to detect the passage of the gaming ball that has entered the second big winning device 610 and give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls) is there. As described above, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from left to right in the left and right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are disposed in parallel at substantially the same height in the left and right direction. That is, the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612. In the present embodiment, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to incline downward from left to right in the left and right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are disposed in parallel at substantially the same height in the left and right directions. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the V shutter 612 is disposed substantially horizontally in the left and right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 is disposed at a position higher than the left prize ball sensor 614 (position closer to the V shutter 612). It is also good.

  The V-bello 615 is slid to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (a V winning opening solenoid 57 b in FIG. 33 described later). The V-Bello 615 is disposed below the left prize ball sensor 614, slides to the back side, and retracts from the front surface of the center plate 600 so that the gaming ball can easily pass through the first guide passage 611f. In the open state, the slide movement to the front side is made, and in the state of projecting from the front face of the center base plate 600, the gaming ball is in the second state (closed state) where it is difficult to pass through the first guide passage 611f.

  The V prize sensor 616 is disposed below the V velo 615 in the game area 120a, is provided with a V prize entrant winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later), and is left when the V vero 615 is in the first state. Among the gaming balls that have passed the award ball sensor 614, it is possible to detect the gaming ball that has passed the first guide passage 611f, and when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, small as described later) It is possible to give a game during a hit process (see FIG. 27 described later).

  The discharge sensor 617 is disposed below the right prize ball sensor 613 in the game area 120a, and among the gaming balls that have passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 or the left prize ball sensor 614 when the V-Bello 615 is in the second state. , It is possible to detect a game ball which has not passed through the first guide passage 611f.

  Returning to FIG. 11, a specific area 611c is formed at the top of the second big winning device 610, and the V shutter 612 is disposed in the specific area 611c. A distribution unit 611e is disposed below the specific area 611c. The right prize ball sensor 613 is disposed at the right hem of the distribution unit 611e, and the left prize ball sensor 614 is disposed at the left hem of the distribution unit 611e. That is, the distributing unit 611e can distribute the gaming balls having passed through the specific area 611c to the left prize ball sensor 614 which is one first passage detecting means and the right prize ball sensor 613 which is the other first passage detecting means. It is.

  Below the left prize ball sensor 614, a first guide passage 611f leading to the V prize sensor 616 is formed, and below the right prize ball sensor 613, a second guide passage 611g leading to the discharge sensor 617 is formed. . Further, a V-bello 615 is disposed in the first guide passage 611f, and a third guide passage 611h connected to the second guide passage 611g is connected above the V-bello 615. With such a configuration, the gaming ball having passed the left prize ball sensor 614 can pass through the first guiding passage 611f when the V-bello 615 is in the first state (opened state). On the other hand, when the V-bello 615 is in the second state (closed state), the gaming ball having passed the left prize ball sensor 614 passes through the third guiding passage 611h and flows into the second guiding passage 611g, and the second guiding passage 611g , And can be detected by the discharge sensor 617. Further, the gaming ball having passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 is guided to the second guide passage 611g and is detected by the discharge sensor 617 regardless of the state of the V-bello 615.

  According to the second big winning device 610 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects can be obtained. According to the second big winning device 610, for example, the player can play the first game ball entered into the second big winning device 610 when the V shutter 612 is in the first state (for example, the open state). When guided by the guiding passage 611f, the second guiding passage 611g, or the third guiding passage 611h, at least a part of the gaming balls can be viewed. Since the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V prize sensor 616, and the discharge sensor 617 are provided in the game area 120a, the game balls rolling on the game area 120a can be detected. Therefore, the gaming ball can roll on the gaming area 120a at least immediately before the gaming ball is detected by each sensor.

  Therefore, for the player, it is possible to visually recognize at least a part of the game ball from the time the game ball enters the second big winning device 610 to the time when each of the sensors reaches the second big winning device. It is possible to improve the visibility of the gaming balls in the device 610. In addition, since it becomes possible to roll the game area 120a until the game ball is detected by each sensor, performing effects using the game ball rolling the game area 120a even in the second big winning device 610 As a result, it becomes possible to improve the rendering effect for the player.

  In addition, the first guidance passage 611f, the second guidance passage 611g and the third guidance passage 611h are provided in the game area 120a, and the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V prize sensor 616 and the discharge sensor 617 Since the game area 120a can be used as a part of the second big winning device 610 because it is provided in the area 120a, for example, it is possible to omit the passage path of the game ball provided on the back side of the conventional game board Also, the configuration of the variable winning device can be simplified.

  In addition, when the game ball which rolls game area 120a passes V prize sensor 616, if it passes with the speed which rolls game area 120a while rolling speed is too fast, V prize sensor 616 plays the game It is also conceivable that the passage of the ball can not be accurately detected, and in order for the V prize sensor 616 to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling on the game area 120a. In order to adjust the rolling speed of such a game ball, it is possible to use the reduction portion 611 j. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the gaming ball by the passage detection means.

  Also, for example, when the gaming ball rolls from the upstream to the downstream of the V shutter 612, the speed of the gaming ball is reduced by the contact of the gaming ball with the contact member 611d on the downstream side. It is possible to raise awareness. Further, the distributing unit 611e can distribute the gaming balls to any one of the left prize ball sensor 614 and the right prize ball sensor 613. The game ball having passed the left prize ball sensor 614 may pass the V prize sensor 616 capable of giving an advantageous gaming state to the player, but the game ball passed the right prize ball sensor 613. Passes through the discharge sensor 617 without passing through the V prize sensor 616. That is, whether or not it becomes advantageous for the player is determined by the rolling of the game balls in the distribution unit 611e.

  Therefore, the game property is improved by the distribution unit 611e, and the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced immediately before the distribution unit 611e whose game property is improved by the contact member 611d. Therefore, the visibility to the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to further improve the rendering effect for the player in the second big winning device 610 by the play.

Further, since the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612, the V shutter 612 and the left prize among the gaming balls having passed the V shutter 612 The rolling speed of the gaming ball passing between the V shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 tends to be faster than the gaming ball passing between the ball sensor 614, and the right prize ball sensor 613 Although it may be difficult to detect the passage of the game ball, it is possible to reliably detect the passage of the game ball also by the right prize ball sensor 613 by decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball by the contact member 611d.
In addition, since the contact member 611 d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614, it is more preferable than the gaming machine in which the contact members are provided above both prize ball sensors. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.

In addition, by providing the contact member 611d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d can be used to collect the player's awareness of the game balls while playing the game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest for
Also, by providing the contact member 611 d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the gaming ball passing through the left prize ball sensor 614 is not reduced. The gaming ball having passed the left prize ball sensor 614 quickly rolls in the direction of the V-bello 615.
If the contact member 611d is also present above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the gaming ball is excessively reduced, and the V-Bello 615 is placed after the gaming ball passes the left prize ball sensor 614. It takes a long time to pass through the first guide passage 611f.
This is because, when the opening time (time in the first state) is provided in the V-Bello 615, the falling speed of the gaming ball is reduced, so the opening time ends and the V-Bello 615 is closed (second State, and the game ball having passed the left prize ball sensor 614 loses the opportunity to pass through the first guide passage 611f. For this reason, according to the second big winning device 610 of the modification 1, the falling speed of the game ball is reached before reaching the V-bello 615 by not providing the contact member 611d above the left prize ball sensor 614. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the disadvantage to the player due to the reduction.
And since it does not reduce the fall speed of a game ball until it passes the 1st guidance passage 611f in which the V bello 615 is arrange | positioned as above mentioned in the 2nd big prize apparatus 610 of the modification 1, Upstream, a speed reducing portion 611 j is provided, and a mechanism for temporarily reducing the rolling speed of the gaming ball is provided.

  As described above, in the first guide passage 611f, it is possible to guide the V prize sensor 616 to pass the game ball after the game ball having passed the V-bello 615 is decelerated by the deceleration portion 611j. For this reason, the player's awareness of the game ball is concentrated on the game ball whose rolling speed has been temporarily reduced by the reduction portion 611j, and thereafter, a V winning game capable of providing an advantageous game state to the player Since the game ball passes the sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect on the game ball passing the V prize sensor 616.

(1st movable character)
FIG.14 and FIG.15 is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable role thing of the pachinko game machine based on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIGS. 14 and 15 are front views of the first movable part 620, and in order to facilitate understanding of the first movable part 620, only the outline of the decorative part 625 provided on the foremost part is shown by dotted lines. It shows. Further, FIG. 14 shows a state (standby position) before driving of the first movable part 620, and FIG. 15 shows a state (driving position) after driving of the first movable part 620.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first movable part 620 has a base member 621 attached to a center base plate 600 (see FIG. 8), a motor 622 fixed to the back side of the base member 621, and a base member 621. , A movable base 624 provided on the front side of the base member 621, and a decorative portion 625 fixed on the front side of the movable base 624.

  The base member 621 is formed with a pair of engagement grooves 621a which engage with the movable base 624 and extend in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 14 and in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 14). The motor 622 is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The gear 623 is rotated by the drive of the motor 622. The movable base 624 engages with a meshing portion 624a in which a plurality of teeth arranged in the same direction as the engagement groove 621a meshes with the gear 623 and a pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621, and the engagement groove 621a And a pair of engaging portions 624 b movable along the For example, a character or a character is displayed on the decorative portion 625, and an LED substrate is provided, and the LED substrate can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33).

  Next, the operation of the first movable part 620 will be described. In the state (standby position) shown in FIG. 14, when the gear 623 is rotated leftward by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), the first movable part 620 is driven by this driving force. It is transmitted to the meshing portion 624 a of the movable base 624 meshing with 623. Then, in the movable base 624, the pair of engaging portions 624a are guided by the pair of engaging grooves 621a of the base member 621, and the engaging grooves 621a and the engaging portions 624a extend (in the lower direction in the example shown in FIG. 14). Slide to move. In addition, the decorative portion 625 fixed to the movable base 624 also slides along with the movable base 624 to be in the state (drive position) shown in FIG.

  As a result, an effect of sliding the decorative portion 625 in a predetermined direction is possible. Further, by providing the engaging groove 621a of the base member 621 with which the movable base 624 engages as a pair, the movable base 624 is stably slid as compared with the case where only one engaging groove 621a is provided. Is possible.

(2nd movable character)
FIG. 16 to FIG. 19 are views for explaining the configuration of the second movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 16 and 19 are front views of the second movable part 710 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 16 shows a state (initial position) before the second movable part 710 is driven, and FIG. 19 is a second movable part The state (drive position) after driving of the accessory 710 is shown. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second movable part 710 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the second movable part 710 as viewed from the back side. In FIGS. 17 and 18, in order to explain the inside of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715, the first movable member cover 713c and the third movable member of the first movable member 713 shown in FIG. The state which removed the 3rd movable member cover 715c of 715 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable part 710 includes a base member 711, a motor 712, a first movable member 713, a second movable member 714, and a third movable member 715 as a first member. And a fourth movable member 716.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the base member 711 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and a second transmission member rotatably supported by the base main body 711a as the first member main body and the base main body 711a. And a motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) that meshes with the base transmission member 711b.

  The base main body 711a has a pair of left and right arc-shaped outer edges, and a base tooth portion 711d as a pair of left and right first member teeth in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. A movable member receiving portion 711e which protrudes from the base tooth portion 711d in the left-right direction and supports the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 in the initial state from below; Is formed. When the second movable part 710 is in the initial state (the state before driving or in the standby state) by the movable member receiving portion 711e, the load applied to the joint of each part is increased in the movable part in which many parts spread in the left and right direction. It becomes possible to reduce and to prevent the failure by the malfunction of a junction. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, a base front panel 711 f having an outer shape which is symmetrical in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base body 711 a. The base front panel 711 f is formed in a shape in which the shape of the upper edge (arc shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) and the shape of the lower edge (linear shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) are different. Thereby, the formation object which has the diversity from which a shape differs by outer periphery and inner periphery can be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the base transmission member 711b is composed of four gears arranged in the left-right direction, and the gears adjacent to each other are in mesh. The motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is configured by a gear, rotates by the drive of the motor 712, and meshes with any of the four gears constituting the base transmission member 711b. The motor 712 is an example of a driving unit, is fixed to the base member 711, and is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first movable member 713 is rotatably supported by the first movable member main body 713a pivotally supported by the base member 711 at the right end side and by the first movable member main body 713a. And a first movable member cover 713c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the first movable member main body 713a and covering the first transmission member 713b.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the first movable member main body 713a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a first movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge It has 713d. The first movable member tooth portion 713d meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the base transmission member 711b. As a result, the motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is rotated by the drive of the motor 712, and the base transmission member 711b meshing with the motor drive transmission member 711c is rotated to mesh with the base transmission member 711b. The first movable member main body 713a having the member tooth portion 713d pivots. That is, the first movable member main body 713a is rotated by the drive of the motor 712 via the motor drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first transmission member 713 b is arranged in the left-right direction, and is configured by two gears meshing with each other, and the gear at the right end meshes with the left base tooth portion 711 d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable member cover 713c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the left half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the second movable member 714 is fixed on the front side of the second movable member main body 714a whose right end is pivotally supported by the first movable member 713 and the second movable member main body 714a. And a second movable member cover 714b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the second movable member main body 714a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a second movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge It has 714c. The second movable member tooth portion 714c meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the first transmission member 713b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable member cover 714b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the left half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third movable member 715 is rotatably pivotally supported by the third movable member main body 715a pivotably supported by the base member 711 at the left end side and by the third movable member main body 715a. And a third movable member cover 715c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the third movable member main body 715a and covering the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the third movable member main body 715a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a third movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge It has 715d. The third movable member tooth portion 715d meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third transmission member 715 b is arranged in the left-right direction, and is configured by two gears meshing with each other, and the gear at the left end meshes with the right base tooth portion 711 d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the third movable member cover 715c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the right half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the fourth movable member 716 is fixed on the front side of the fourth movable member main body 716a whose left end is pivotally supported by the third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member main body 716a. And a fourth movable member cover 716b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fourth movable member main body 716a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge It has 716c. The fourth movable member tooth portion 716c meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the fourth movable member cover 716b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the right half of the base front panel 711f.

  Next, the operation of the second movable part 710 will be described. When the motor 712 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, right rotation) by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the state (initial position) before driving shown in FIG. The drive transmission member 711 c and the base transmission member 711 b rotate. At this time, among the four gears of the base transmission member 711b, the gear at the left end pivots to the left, and the gear at the right end pivots to the right. Then, the first movable member 713 meshing with the gear at the left end of the base transmission member 711b pivots to the right, and the third movable member 715 meshing with the gear at the right end of the base transmission member 711b pivots to the left. That is, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 rotate so as to approach each other.

  Then, when the first movable member 713 rotates to the right, the right gear of the first transmission member 713b meshing with the left base tooth portion 711d rotates to the right, and the left gear meshing with the right gear is to the left To rotate. In addition, when the third movable member 715 rotates to the left, the left gear of the third transmission member 715b that meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d rotates to the left, and the right gear that meshes with the left gear is to the right To rotate.

  Then, the second movable member 714 which meshes with the left gear of the first transmission member 713b pivots to the right. In addition, the fourth movable member 716 which meshes with the right gear of the third transmission member 715 b pivots to the left. That is, the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate so as to be close to each other. Then, the second movable product 710 moves to the drive position, which is the stopped position after the end portions of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate to the positions facing each other, as shown in FIG. It becomes a state.

  As described above, the right gear of the first transmission member 713 b is installed on the first movable member 713, and the left gear of the third transmission member 715 b is installed on the third movable member 715. When the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, the rotation axis (axis) of the right gear of the first transmission member 713b and the rotation axis of the left gear of the third transmission member 715b ( Axis) also moves. At this time, the left base tooth portion 711d with which the right gear of the first transmission member 713b meshes and the right base tooth 711d with which the left gear of the third transmission member 715b meshes are part of the base member 711 And is fixed. Thus, movement of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 rotates the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b. That is, as the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, a driving force for rotating the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member The fourth movable member cover 716b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the half portion of the base front panel 711f of the base member 711, so that the base front panel 711f, the first movable member cover 713c, and the A formed body having a predetermined shape (a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape in the example shown in FIG. 19) by the two movable member cover 714b, the third movable member cover 715c, and the fourth movable member cover 716b ) Integrally.

  The second movable part 710 includes the first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and the third movable member 715c. When the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 moves to the drive position, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, and the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716; By bringing the ends of the two into close proximity to each other, one component (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a component having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape) is completed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the end portions of the second movable member cover 714 b of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member cover 716 b of the fourth movable member 716 are close to each other, the second movable member When the second movable member cover 714 b and the fourth movable member cover 716 b exist at a short distance, including the case where the end of the cover 714 b and the fourth movable member cover 716 b come into contact, When the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b overlap in the front-rear direction when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are viewed, or the second movable member cover 714b And the fourth movable member cover 716b is close (or in contact) in the front and rear, up and down, and left and right directions. Further, when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are close to each other, the second movable part 710 has a hexagonal outer shape as an example shown in FIG. Although the player has a circular inner shape, the player can view the display area 13a (see FIG. 3) through the inner side of the circular shape, and the circular inner shape and the display in the display area 13a Perform interlocking (for example, display characters, characters, images, etc. in the area of the display area 13a that can be viewed through the inside of the circular inner shape) to produce an effect, and the player's movable member and the display area It may be made to improve the interest to the presentation to be performed. In addition, the hexagonal outer shape and the circular inner shape described above are treated as one component, and the display interlocked with the hexagonal outer shape is performed in the display area 13a, and the display interlocked with the circular inner shape is displayed. It is also possible to do in the display area 13a. In addition, the shape of the completion state of the 2nd movable character thing 710 is not limited to a hexagonal shape, It can be set as arbitrary shapes, as long as it is a shape which forms cyclic | annular form, square shape, and other one structure.

  When the motor 712 is rotated in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, left rotation) under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the drive position shown in FIG. Is rotated to the initial position shown in FIG.

  According to the second movable combination 710 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are achieved. According to the second movable part 710, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 is generated from the motor 712. On the other hand, in the driving force for rotating the second movable member 714, the meshing position of the first transmission member 713b and the base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711 is moved with the rotation of the first movable member main body 713a. Generated by

  As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 is not only generated simply by the motor 712, but also the portions where the driving force is generated are different from each other. Therefore, for example, the driving mode of the first movable member 713 can be determined by the motor 712, and the driving mode of the second movable member 714 can be determined by the base member 711, for example, two movable units by one driving means. It is possible to drive the members in different ways.

  Therefore, the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 rotate while being interlocked with each other, by the driving forces having different occurrence points. For this reason, it becomes possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable part which consists of a plurality of movable members, and it becomes possible to give an individual rendering effect to each movable member, and to enhance the rendering effect synergistically. Therefore, even in the case where a plurality of movable members are interlocked, it is possible to enhance the individual rendering effects of the respective movable members and to improve the interest of the player in the rendering.

  In addition, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 move to the drive position, whereby the base member 711, the first movable member 713, and the second movable member 714 are moved. The third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member 716 integrally form a formed body having a predetermined shape. As a result, while the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 are interlocked, it is possible to diversify the variation of the operation and at the drive position. Thus, it is possible to form a predetermined shape and complete it. Therefore, each movable member can have an individual rendering effect, and it becomes possible to synergistically enhance the rendering effect, and it is also possible to improve the rendering effect as the entire movable combination.

  Further, the end portion of the second movable member 714 pivotally supported by the first movable member 713 and the end portion of the fourth movable member 716 pivotally supported by the third movable member 715 approach each other at the drive position. The base member 711, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 form a complete state in which one component is formed. As a result, it is possible to rotate the plurality of movable members individually to the drive position, and to form a structure in which all of the movable members are connected at the drive position. Therefore, each movable member can have an individual rendering effect, and it becomes possible to synergistically enhance the rendering effect, and it is possible to further improve the rendering effect as the entire movable combination.

(The 3rd movable role thing of modification 1)
FIG. 20 is a front view of a third movable role and a fourth movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The third movable character is viewed from the front side, and the upper left third movable character 720 arranged at the upper left, the upper right third movable character 730 arranged at the upper right, and the lower left third movable arranged at the lower left An accessory 740 and a lower right third movable accessory 750 disposed at the lower right. FIG. 20 shows the state before driving of the upper left third movable character 720, the upper right third movable character 730, the lower left third movable character 740, the lower right third movable character 750, and the fourth movable character 760 Position) is shown. 21 to 23 are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the upper left third movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the upper left third movable part 720 as viewed from the back side, and FIGS. 22 and 23 are rear views of the upper left third movable part 720. FIG. 22 shows a state (standby position) before driving the upper left third movable part 720, and FIG. 23 shows a state (driving position) after driving the upper left third movable part 720. As shown in FIG. 22 and 23, the description of flat cable 728 is omitted to facilitate understanding, and only the outer shape of arm member 723 is shown, and of the outer shapes of arm member 723, base member 721 is a back surface. The part which can not be seen from the side is shown with a dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper left third movable part 720 has a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 723 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a pivoting member. And 725.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the base member 721 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and the motor 722 is attached. Further, the base member 721 is a base rotating portion 721a which is rotated at a predetermined distance from the rotation shaft 722a of the motor 722 by the drive of the motor 722, and a plurality projecting in the radial direction along the outer edge of the arc shape. And a position detecting portion 721c for detecting the state of the base rotating portion 721a at the standby position.

  The base rotation portion 721a has a detection piece 721a 'detected by the position detection portion 721c at the standby position. The position detection unit 721c is, for example, a photo sensor, detects the detection piece 721a ′ of the base rotation unit 721a, and when it detects the detection piece 721a, for example, the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. 3 Send a standby position signal indicating that the movable part is in the standby position. The position detection unit 721c is provided only at the position where the detection piece 721a 'is detected at the standby position, but may be provided at the position where the detection piece 721a' is detected at the drive position. When the position detection unit 721 c provided at this position detects the detection piece 721 a ′, for example, the sub control circuit 200 described later receives a drive position signal indicating that the third movable part is at the drive position. Send.

  The motor 722 is an example of a driving unit, is attached to the base member 721, and is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  The arm member 723 is formed in a substantially V shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 721 around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the vertex of the substantially V shape. The arm member 723 extends from the proximal end toward the predetermined position 723a on the proximal side of the predetermined position 723a, and the engagement groove 723b in which the base rotation portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged, and And a magnet 723c for drawing a contact member 726b of a second connection member 726 described later on the tip side of the position 723a. Further, when the base pivoting portion 721a is pivoted by the drive of the motor 722, the arm pivoting portion 721a pivots while sliding on the engagement groove 723b, thereby centering on the predetermined position 723a. Rotate. That is, the arm member 723 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 centering on the predetermined position 723 a, and is pivoted by the drive of the motor 722.

  The first connecting member 724 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723. The first connecting member 724 is fixed to the first gear 724a meshing with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 and the first gear 724a, and meshes with the second connecting member 726 described later, and the first gear 724a And a second gear 724b having the same axis. In the first connecting member 724, when the axial center moves by the rotation of the arm member 723 and the contact position meshing with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 moves and rotates. The second gear 724b is not limited to being fixed to the first gear 724a, and may be rotatably fixed to any of the first connecting members 724, and is integrally formed with the first gear 724a. It is also good.

  The pivoting member 725 is pivotally supported by the arm member 723 and pivots about a predetermined position 723a and pivots about a specific position 725a that is a predetermined distance from the predetermined position 723a. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the pivoting member 725 includes a second connecting member 726, an electric decorative body 727 which is an example of a decoration member, and a flat cable 728 as a connecting member.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the second connection member 726 is pivotally supported by the arm member 723 so as to rotate around the predetermined position 723 a in response to the rotation of the arm member 723 and to perform the first connection. It meshes with the member 724, and pivots about the specific position 725a as the first connection member 724 pivots.

  The second connection member 726 includes a second connection member main body 726a, an abutment member 726b, a housing portion 726c, and a locking portion 726d. The second connecting member main body 726a is configured by a gear and meshes with the second gear 724b of the first connecting member 724. The contact member 726b is formed on the periphery of the second connection member main body 726a, is formed of a ferromagnetic material, and is attracted to and joined to the magnet 723c in the vicinity of the magnet 723c of the arm member 723. In the second connection member 726, a magnet 723c is provided instead of the contact member 726b formed of ferromagnetic material, and in the arm member 723 the contact member 726b formed of ferromagnetic material instead of the magnet 723c. You may provide. The contact member 726b is not limited to a ferromagnetic material, and may be formed of a magnet having a polarity that attracts the magnet 723c.

  FIG. 24 is a view for explaining the configuration of the second connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. The housing portion 726c is formed in a cylindrical shape erected on the back side of the second connection member main body 726a, and accommodates a tape measure portion 728a of a flat cable 728 described later. The locking portion 726d is a hole formed in the second connection member main body 726a inside the housing portion 726c, and one end side of a later-described tape measure portion 728a housed inside the housing portion 726c is from the back side to the front side As well as being penetrable, one end of the tape portion 728a is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the electric decorative body 727 is attached to the front side of the second connection member 726, and includes a decorative member 727a and an electric decoration substrate 727b. The decoration member 727a is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a shape obtained by dividing a doughnut shape into four. The electric decoration board 727b is provided on the back side of the decoration member 727a, and a flat cable 728 described later is connected. Under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later via 728, the decorative member 727a can emit light in a predetermined mode.

  As shown in FIG. 21, one end of the flat cable 728 is connected to the electric decoration 727 via the second connection member 726, and the other end is connected to the sub control circuit 200 described later via various relay boards (see FIG. 33). )It is connected to the. As shown in FIG. 24, the flat cable 728 is wound around one end at a specific position 725a and formed into a rolled shape so as to be elastically deformable, and the winding direction (direction in which the second connection member 726 rotates) It has a tape measure 728a having a biasing force. The taped portion 728a is housed in the housing portion 726c of the second connection member 726, and one end thereof extends from the locking portion 726d to the front side and is connected to the electric decoration board 727b (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable part 720 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) rotates the upper left third movable part 720 from the standby position shown in FIG. 22 in a predetermined direction by a predetermined number of steps from the standby position to the drive position. It is turned to be in the state shown in FIG. In addition, the sub control circuit 200 moves the motor 722 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction until the detection piece 721a 'is detected from the drive position by the position detection unit 721c from the drive position and the detection position signal is transmitted. By rotating to the standby position.

  More specifically, the upper left third movable part 720 is at the base position shown in FIG. 22 when the motor 722 is rotated in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the standby position to start the rotation. The moving part 721a rotates while sliding on the engaging groove 723b of the arm member 723. Accordingly, the arm member 723 rotates around the predetermined position 723a.

  Then, the first connecting member 724 meshing with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 is also rotated. The pivoting member 725 engaged with the first connecting member 724 rotates about the arm member 723 and the predetermined position 723a, and rotates about the predetermined position 723a about the specific position 725a. Rotate in the opposite direction. Thus, the second connecting member 726 of the pivoting member 725 pivots from the standby position to start pivoting to the driving position to finish pivoting in the pivoting around the specific position 725a, as shown in FIG. It will be in the state shown. Note that the rotation member 725 stops rotation immediately before the contact member 726b abuts against the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position by the drive control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by bringing the contact member 726b into contact with the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position. The contact member 726 b can be biased by the magnet 723 c in the direction of the drive position by the magnetic force in the vicinity of the drive position. At this time, the rolled portion 728a (see FIG. 24) of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction in the housing portion 726c of the second connection member 726, whereby the locking portion of the second connection member 726 The pivoting member 725 is biased toward the standby position via 726d. In the present embodiment, to be biased by the magnetic force means that the members attract each other due to the magnetic force, or as a result of an attractive force acting on the members, the kinetic energy of the members temporarily increases (or the kinetic energy decreases). Includes the case where As a result, when the distance between the members approaches the distance influenced by the magnetic force, the increase in the moving speed of the members (reduction in the moving speed is reduced compared to the case where these members are not affected by the magnetic force In addition, the increase in acceleration of the member (including the decrease in acceleration) may be considered. In addition, for example, it is also possible to suppress movement of the member in an unintended direction (for example, when moving from the standby position to the drive position in the direction of the standby position) due to backlash. Can.

  The upper right third movable character 730, the lower left third movable character 740, and the lower right third movable character 750 have the same configuration as the upper left third movable character 720, but have the same configuration and operate similarly. , I omit the explanation.

  According to the upper left third movable character object 720 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are achieved. According to the upper left third movable part 720, when the motor 722 is driven, the arm member 723 rotates, and the arm member 723 rotates so that the rotating member 725 is centered on the specific position 725a from the standby position It turns to the drive position. For example, the arm member 723 or the like is provided with the magnet 723c with which the contact member 726b of the second connection member 726 abuts at the drive position and the contact member 726b is formed of a ferromagnetic material. In this case, the contact member 726b is not biased by maintaining a constant distance between the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b. On the other hand, when the second connection member 726 is pivoted to the drive position, proximity or contact between the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b enables biasing of goods by attractive force (magnetic force).

  As described above, the second connecting member 726 for rotating the movable rotating member 725 is provided with the contact member 726b biased by the magnetic force at the driving position at which the rotating is finished. Even in the configuration where the accessory like this is driven alone, the state after operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, the configuration capable of fixing the moving item makes it possible to easily stabilize the state after the moving of the item.

  In addition, the tape-shaped portion 728a of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction in the housing portion 726c of the second connection member 726, and the elastic force of the flat cable 728 causes the second connection member By urging 726 in the direction of the standby position, it is possible to increase the movable speed of the second connection member 726, and since the second connection member 726 is used as the storage position of the flat cable 728, It is possible to achieve space.

  Further, in the rotation member 725, the flat cable 728 connected to the electric decorative body 727 attached to the second connection member 726 is formed with the tape measure 728a, one end of the tape measure 728a is the second connection member 726 The second connection member 726 is stopped by biasing the second connection member 726 in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion 726d which is locked by the biasing force in the winding direction in the inside of the housing portion 726c. When this occurs, it is possible to reduce the fine movement of the pivoting member 725 due to the backlash.

  In addition, when the second connection member 726 is rotated to the drive position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b approach or abut each other, thereby biasing the role by attraction (magnetic force). Even if the position detection sensor for detecting the state of the object is not provided, for example, even when the motor 722 rotates excessively or when the rotation is insufficient, the accessory can be disposed at the proper drive position.

(The 3rd movable role thing of modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. The second modification is different from the first modification in the configuration of the third movable part. In the following description of Modification 2, the same configuration as that of Modification 1 is given the same reference numeral as necessary, and the description thereof will be simplified or omitted. The third movable part of the second modification differs from the third movable part of the first modification in the configuration of the arm member and further includes a third connecting member. Further, the third movable combination of the second modification is the same as the third movable combination of the first modification, with the upper left third movable combination, the upper right third movable combination, the lower left third movable combination and the lower right third. Although three movable prizes are provided, although they have different orientations, they have similar configurations and operate in the same manner, so the description will be omitted and only the upper left third movable prize will be described.

  FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 are views for explaining the configuration of the upper left third movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 25 to 27 are front views of the upper left third movable part 820. FIG. Further, FIG. 25 shows a state (standby position) before driving of the upper left third movable part 820, and FIG. 26 shows a state (intermediate position) during driving of the upper left third movable part 820. These show the state (drive position) after driving of the upper left third movable part 820. In FIGS. 25 to 27, in order to facilitate understanding, the second arm member 832 omits the front side cover and shows the outer frame, and the first arm member 831 is seen from the front side by the base member 721. The non-portion shows the outline by a dotted line, and the illumination body 727 which is an example of the decorative member shows the outline by a dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the upper left third movable part 820 has a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 830 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a pivoting member. 725 and a third connecting member 840. The base member 721, the motor 722, the first connecting member 724, and the pivoting member 725 have the same configuration as in the first modification, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The arm member 830 includes a first arm member 831 as a first arm member and a second arm member 832 as a second arm member. The first arm member 831 is formed in a substantially V-shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 721 around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the apex of the substantially V-shape. The first arm member 831 extends from the proximal end toward the predetermined position 723a on the proximal side of the predetermined position 723a, and engages with the engaging groove 723b in which the base rotation portion 721a of the base member 721 slidably engages. Prepare. Further, the first arm member 831 has a tip open on the tip side of the predetermined position 723a, and holds the second arm member 832 slidingly moving in a direction in which it protrudes from the tip. In addition, when the base pivoting portion 721a is pivoted by the drive of the motor 722, the first arm member 831 is pivoted while sliding on the engagement groove 723b, whereby the predetermined position 723a is moved. It pivots to the center. That is, the arm member 830 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 centering on the predetermined position 723 a, and is pivoted by the drive of the motor 722.

  FIG. 28 is a view for explaining the configuration of an arm member of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA 'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB' in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the first arm member 831 extends in a direction in which a second arm member 832 described later slides, and slides along with the second arm member 832 at the end of the rotation shaft 726 e of the second connecting member 726 And a slide groove 831a slidably engaged. The slide groove 831a has a length substantially the same as the slidable distance of the second arm member 832, and a height substantially the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connection member 726. It is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the second arm member 832 slidably engages with the first arm member 831 and pivotally supports the second connecting member 726 of the rotation member 725. In addition, the second arm member 832 includes a magnet 723c for pulling the contact member 726b of the second connection member 726 and a fourth connection member 835 capable of meshing with a third connection member 840 described later.

  The fourth connection member 835 is opposed to the end surface of the third connection member 840, and a plurality of teeth formed on the end surface of the third connection member 840 can be engaged with the surface extending in the sliding direction of the second arm member 832 Teeth are formed.

  FIG. 29 is a view for explaining the configuration of the third connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. The third connecting member 840 is attached to the front side of the second gear 724 b of the first connecting member 724, and rotates with the rotation of the first connecting member 724. The third connecting member 840 has a plurality of teeth formed on the end face of the disc shape, and no teeth are formed on the end face of the disc shaped meshing region 841 that meshes with the fourth connecting member 835. And a non-contact area 842 not in contact with the

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable part 820 will be described. When the motor 722 is rotated in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the standby position where rotation of the upper left third movable part 820 is started as shown in FIG. It pivots around the position 723a.

  Then, the first connecting member 724 meshing with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 is also rotated. At this time, the third connection member 840 attached to the first connection member 724 also rotates, but since the non-contact area 842 is close to the fourth connection member 835 of the second arm member 832, the third connection The member 840 and the fourth connecting member 835 do not mesh. The rotation member 725 engaged with the first connecting member 724 rotates about the arm member 830 and the predetermined position 723a, and rotates about the predetermined position 723a about the specific position 725a. Rotate in the opposite direction. Thus, the second connecting member 726 of the pivoting member 725 pivots from the standby position to start pivoting to the intermediate position to finish pivoting in the pivoting around the specific position 725a, as shown in FIG. It will be in the state shown. When the contact member 726b abuts on the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at this intermediate position, the pivoting member 725 stops rotating about the specific position 725a. The pivoting member 725 stops the pivoting immediately before the abutment member 726b abuts against the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at an intermediate position by drive control by the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by the abutment member 726b abutting on the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at an intermediate position.

  When the left upper third movable part 820 is in the state shown in FIG. 26, the meshing area 841 of the third connecting member 840 is close to the fourth connecting member 835 of the second arm member 832, and the third connecting member 840 and The fourth connecting member 835 engages with the arm member 830, and the arm member 830 pivots about the predetermined position 723a.

  Then, the third connecting member 840 rotates while meshing with the fourth connecting member 835 together with the first connecting member 724, and slides the second arm member 832 in the direction of protruding from the tip of the first arm member 831; It will be in the state shown in FIG. That is, the third connecting member 840 meshes with the fourth connecting member 835 after the second arm member 832 rotates the rotating member 725 including the electric decorative body 727 from the standby position by the turning of the second connecting member 726. When the third connecting member 840 rotates, the third connecting member 840 slides in the direction in which it extends from the tip end of the first arm member 831. In addition, the electric decorative body 727 slides and moves in a direction in which the second arm member 832 extends from the distal end side of the first arm member 831, thereby causing the other member (for example, a decoration member of the upper right third movable part) It is possible to touch.

  According to the upper left third movable role item 820 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the first embodiment described above, the following effects are achieved. According to the upper left third movable part 820, the third connection member 840 is the fourth connection member of the second arm member 832 after the electric decorative body 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connection member 726 from the standby position. By meshing with 835, the first connecting member 724 and the third connecting member 840 rotate by the rotation of the first arm member 831, and the second arm member 832 slides in the extending direction, and other members It is possible to make contact. As described above, after performing the effect of rotating the electric decorative body 727, the electric decorative body 727 can be made to slide, for example, to be able to quickly rotate the electric decorative body 727 by making it possible to contact other members. It is possible to make contact with other members slowly. Therefore, breakage of the movable part due to contact with other members can be avoided.

In addition, a plurality of movable actors provided with such an electric decoration (upper left third movable actor, upper right third movable actor, lower left third movable actor and lower right third movable actor) are interlocked with these Since it has been made to rotate, after making it turn in the direction which each 2nd arm member extends, after making it turn an electric decoration of a plurality of movable goods, it becomes possible to make electric decoration abut. As a result, when rotating, the plurality of electric ornaments that do not form one design contact each other to form one design when they move in the direction in which the second arm members extend. Since it is possible to perform a rendition, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the movement of the light decoration and to improve the rendition expression by the light decoration.
Therefore, when the movable part is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by the movable part while avoiding breakage of the movable part due to the contact.

  In addition, when the second arm member 832 slides, the end of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connection member 726 slides while engaging with the slide groove 831a, so that the slide groove serves as a guide and the second connection It is possible to suppress the swing of the electric decorative body 727 attached to the member 726 and to move it smoothly.

(4th movable role thing)
FIG.30 and FIG.31 is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable role thing of the pachinko game machine based on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. 30 and 31 are rear views of the fourth movable character 760. FIG. FIG. 30 shows the state (standby position) of the fourth movable part 760 before driving, and FIG. 31 shows the state (driving position) of the fourth movable part 760 after driving.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth movable part 760 includes a base member 761, a motor 762, a first gear 763, a second gear 764, a relay member 765, an arm member 766, and a decorative portion 767. And.

  The base member 761 is attached to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8). The motor 762 is fixed to the front side of the base member 761 and driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The first gear 763 is disposed on the back side of the base member 761 and is rotated by the drive of the motor 762. The second gear 764 is disposed on the back side of the base member 761 and meshes with the first gear 763. One end of the relay member 765 is pivotably attached near the periphery of the second gear 764, and the other end is pivotably attached to the arm member 766.

  The arm member 766 is formed in a substantially V-shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 761 around a predetermined position 766a in the vicinity of the vertex of the substantially V-shape. The arm member 766 is pivotably attached to the other end of the relay member 765 at the base end side from the predetermined position 766a, and the decorative portion 767 is attached to the tip end side from the predetermined position 723a.

  The decorative portion 767 is attached to the tip end side of the arm member 766 and formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a circular shape), for example, a character or a character is displayed, or an LED substrate is provided. Under the control of 200 (see FIG. 33), light can be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode. In addition, the decorative portion 767 includes a motor, and rotates the decorative portion 767 under the control of the sub control circuit 200, and further provides another member and rotates the other member on the front side of the decorative portion 767. You can also.

  Next, the operation of the fourth movable part 760 will be described. When the first gear 763 is rotated by the drive of the motor 762 by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the state (standby position) shown in FIG. The second gear 764 engaged with the first gear 763 is transmitted. Then, one end of the relay member 765 pivotably attached near the periphery of the second gear 764 pivots, and the arm member 766 attached to the other end of the relay member 765 also pivots about the predetermined position 766a. . As a result, the decorative portion 767 attached to the distal end side of the arm member 766 also pivots to be in the state (driving position) shown in FIG.

  As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that the decorative portion 767 pivots in a predetermined direction. Further, the arm member 766 is rotated by the relay member 765 rotatably mounted in the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the second gear 764 which is rotated by obtaining the driving force. Thus, for example, when there is no space in the arm member 766 for providing a gear meshing with the second gear 764 which rotates by obtaining the driving force, there is another member between the second gear 764 and the second Even when the gear 764 can not be engaged, the arm member 766 can be rotated.

  FIG. 32 is a front view of the third moveable product and the fourth moveable product of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 32 shows a state after driving of the upper left third movable character 720, the upper right third movable character 730, the lower left third movable character 740, the lower right third movable character 750 and the fourth movable character 760 Position) is shown. The upper left third movable part 720, the upper right third movable part 730, the lower left third movable part 740, the lower right third movable part 750 and the fourth movable part 760 are sub-controlled from the state shown in FIG. It drives by drive control of the circuit 200 (refer FIG. 33), and it will be in the state shown in FIG.

  The upper left third movable character 720, the upper right third movable character 730, the lower left third movable character 740, and the lower right third movable character 750 are each formed into four divided donut shapes at the drive position. The decorative member 727a of the upper left third movable character 720, the decorative member 737a of the upper right third movable character 730, the decorative member 747a of the lower left third movable character 740, and the decorative member 757a of the lower right third movable character 750 Abutment with or adjacent to the decorative members adjacent to each other to integrally form a toroidal shaped body. The fourth movable character 760 is lowered while being rotated from above the circular decorative portion 767, and is disposed at the center of the doughnut-shaped formed body. As described above, the rendering can be improved by driving the plurality of movable objects and arranging them integrally or in a related manner in the state after driving (the driving position).

[Circuit configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls the game operation, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the rendering operation according to the progress of the game, and mainly the game balls. And a payout control circuit 300 for controlling the payout.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. The main control circuit 70 also includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the first embodiment, the lottery process of the special symbol is performed at the time of winning of the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, but this processing is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 doubles as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 44 to 62) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables that the main CPU 71 needs for various processes.

  Although the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. .

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices operating according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol hold display device 63, the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65. Be done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal motorized product solenoid 46a, a first big winning device solenoid 54b, a second big winning opening solenoid 53b and a V winning opening solenoid 57b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric service combination solenoid 46 a to bring the pair of wing-like members of the ordinary electric combination 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big winning opening solenoid 54b and the second big winning opening solenoid 53b, respectively, to put the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 in the open or closed state. Do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the V winning opening solenoid 57b to bring the V winning opening 57 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various switches and receives output signals from the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count switches 53c and 54c, general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, passing ball switches 43a, a first starting hole winning ball switch 44a and a second starting hole winning ball switch 45a and V. The winning opening winning ball switch 57 c and the backup clear switch 121 are connected.

  The count switch 54c counts the gaming balls that have won the first big winning device 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count switch 53c counts the gaming balls that have won the second big winning device 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball switch 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 51, and the general winning ball switch 52a has the gaming ball in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

  In addition, when the gaming ball passes the ball passage detector 43, the passage ball switch 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70. When the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44, the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70.

  The second starting opening winning ball switch 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45. Also, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the game arcade manager or the like at the time of power interruption or the like. .

  Further, a payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of winning balls which is the number of gaming balls to be paid out via the winning ball case unit 170 described later on the condition that a predetermined payout condition is established.

  The main control circuit 70 for determining the number of winning balls constitutes a payout amount determining means. It should be noted that the fact that the game ball has won in the various starting openings and the various winning openings described above is taken as a predetermined payout condition.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of winning balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a winning ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission means.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 83 to 90) for controlling the payout operation of the game balls by the winning ball case unit 170 and the like.

  The payout CPU 301 executes various processes in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables that the payout CPU 301 needs for various processes.

  Although the RAM 303 is used as the temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium.

  The payout control circuit 300 is connected to a winning ball case unit 170 that pays out a gaming ball. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174 and the first and second count switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300, respectively.

  The first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect gaming balls replenished in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and a predetermined output signal indicating the result is a payout control circuit Output to 300.

  The payout motor 174 is driven in response to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, respectively, and indicate the result A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, a payout state notification display device 178 and a lower tray full-tank switch 179 are connected. The payout state notification display device 178, which will be described in detail later, is a display device for notifying of the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs with regard to the payout of the game ball, and constitutes a notification means.

  The payout state notification display device 178 is formed of a 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 103, and is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can visually recognize.

  When the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 22 become full, the lower countersink switch 179 detects this and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. The payout control circuit 300, when receiving a signal indicating that the lower tray is full from the lower tray full switch 179, performs notification via the payout state notification display device 178, and causes the main control circuit 70 to lower the lower tray. It outputs a signal indicating that the tank is full.

  Thereby, the main control circuit 70 transmits the effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub tray 22 is full through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED and the liquid crystal display device 13 by the sub control circuit 200. To inform

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, the launch device 15 for launching the gaming ball, the external terminal board 140, and the card unit 150 are connected. In addition, a data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rental balls, which is the number of gaming balls to be paid out via the request case unit 170 described later on condition that a predetermined payout condition is established. The card unit 150 for determining the number of balls for lending constitutes a payout amount determining means. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

  The payout control circuit 300 supplies power to the solenoid actuator of the launch device 15 according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 25 is held by the player and turned clockwise. Thus, the launcher 15 performs control to launch the gaming ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed as an incidental facility of a hall, for example, at the top of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 150 to lend a game ball. When the card unit 150 receives a signal for requesting a game ball to be borrowed from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits, to the payout control circuit 300, a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission means.

  The payout control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

  Thereby, the winning ball case unit 170 pays out the gaming ball. As described above, the payout control circuit 300 which receives the prize ball control command and the rental ball control signal constitutes a signal receiving means.

  In the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 has first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as a function of the payout CPU 301.

  The first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B are each set from the initial value ("1950 times in the first embodiment") set in the security ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 83) described later. While the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game ball, the counter is decremented by "1" each time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses.

  In the first embodiment, a countdown counter is used as the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B, but a counter for count up may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 requires that the payout of the gaming ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, and that the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the gaming ball. The initial value ("1950 times" in the first embodiment) is output each time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses, that is, each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed. 1 "to subtract, ie to update.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a second updating unit. The values updated by the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to values in a narrower range than the values updated by the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B described later. This corresponds to the time during which the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the gaming ball and constitutes a second value.

  The first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B are predetermined from the initial value ("2000 ms" in the first embodiment) set in the security ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in Fig. 83) described later. It is a timer that is decremented by "1" each time a time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses. In the first embodiment, the timer for counting down is used as the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B, but a timer for counting up may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value ("2000 ms" in the first embodiment) for a predetermined time ("in the first embodiment") on condition that the payout of the gaming ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Each time 1 ms ′ ′) elapses, that is, each time when a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed, “1” is decremented, ie, updated.

  Here, the initial value ("2000 ms" in the first embodiment) set in the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B described above is a time during which it is assumed that the security of 15 gaming balls is completed, that is, The time sufficient to pay out a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls from the ball tank 161 is set. The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a first updating unit. The values updated by the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B constitute a first value.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 controls the display 18 in the liquid crystal display device 13, controls the sound generated from the speaker 11, controls the lamp 18 including a decoration lamp, etc. in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. I do.

  That is, based on the command from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game. In the first embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 can not supply a signal to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub control circuit 200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 70. May be provided.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the effect button 23 and is also connected to the effect button switch 23 a that outputs a signal by the operation of the effect button 23. Thereby, the sub control circuit 200 can also perform effect control such as a mini game using the effect button 23, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207. A program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 63 to 80) for controlling the rendering operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 39 to 43). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the first embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with control means. For example, storage such as hard disk drive, CD ROM and DVD-ROM, ROM cartridge, etc. Media may be applied.

  Also, each of the programs may be recorded on separate storage media. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance in a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like.

  The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables that the sub CPU 201 needs for various processes. Although the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium.

  The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as a VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D / A converter converts image data (digital electrical signal) into an image signal (analog electrical signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. In addition, the display control circuit 205 temporarily displays image data such as decoration symbol image data indicating a decoration symbol (identification symbol for effect), background image data, image data for effect, etc. based on an image display instruction supplied from the sub CPU 201. In the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The voice control circuit 206 has a sound source IC for controlling voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM based on an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the read sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the predetermined sound signal to the AMP. The AMP also amplifies the audio signal to generate audio from the speaker 11.

  The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a lamp data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns are stored. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from the plurality of lamp lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on the lamp lighting instruction supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read audio data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the decoration lamp and the like is turned on and off.

[Type of gaming state]
First, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a view showing an example of a table showing basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include "big hit gaming state", "small hitting gaming state" and "time saving gaming state".

  The "big hit gaming state" is a gaming state in which the "big hit game" is performed, and is a gaming state in which the shutter 54a of the first big prize device 54 performs an opening and closing operation. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 performs an opening and closing operation and a plurality of round games are played. The “big hit game” is performed by winning a “big hit” in a lottery performed by entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45.

  When the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, each player wins a "big hit" with a probability of 1/200 (see FIG. 34A). If you win the "big hit", it will be "big hit gaming state". In addition, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when winning a "big hit" by entering the first starting opening 44, 12 pieces of special figure (1) -1-special figure (1) -12 It is divided into one of the special drawing types of. Moreover, the special figure classification at the time of winning a "big hit" by entering the ball to the 2nd starting opening 45 is only special figure (2) -1.

  The contents of the hit in the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are "time when the ball is out." The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. The opening time per shutter 54a is 27.96 seconds (see FIG. 34 (d)). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that ten gaming balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 34A). The game balls entering the first big winning device 54 are paid out 15 per game.

  The expected value of Special Figure (1) -1 is 1%. That is, when the jackpot game is determined, the probability that the hit type is the special figure (1) -1 is 1%. Moreover, the expected value of Special Figure (1) -2 is 44%. In addition, after the "big hit game" of Special Figure (1) -1 and Special Figure (1) -2 is performed after transition from the normal game, the "time-saving game" is performed. Here, the number of times the "time-saving game" is performed is up to 100 times. Although the details will be described later, the number of times the "time saving game" is performed corresponds to the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, the presence or absence of the "time saving game" after the "big hit game" which has not shifted from the "normal game" will be described later.

  In addition, the contents of the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -7 are "outside time with no balls". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time per shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, in this "big hit game", the first big winning device 54 has a game ball It is unlikely to hit the ball. Therefore, in this "big hit game", the possibility of the game ball entering the first big winning device 54 is low, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of each of the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -7 is 1%. In addition, after the "big hit game" of Special Figure (1) -3 to Special Figure (1) -7 is performed after transition from the normal game, the "time-saving game" is conducted. Here, the number of times the "time-saving game" is performed is up to 100 times.

  In addition, the contents of the special figure (1)-8 to the special figure (1)-12 are "No balls out normal". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time per shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, in this "big hit game", the first big winning device 54 has a game ball It is unlikely to hit the ball. Therefore, in this "big hit game", the possibility of the game ball entering the first big winning device 54 is low, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of each of Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -11 is 12%, and the expected value of Special Figure (1) -12 is 2%. In addition, after transitioning from the normal game and after the "big hit game" of Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -12 is played, "time saving game" is not performed, and "Normal game state" Become.

  The hit content of the special view (2) -1 is "with out balls". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. The opening time per one shutter 54a is 27.96 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that ten gaming balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 34A). The game balls entering the first big winning device 54 are paid out 15 per game.

  The expected value of Special Figure (2) -1 is 100%. That is, when a big hit game is determined by entering the second starting opening 45, it is a special figure (2) -1 without fail. After the "big hit game" of Special Figure (2) -1 is performed, the "time-saving game" is played. Here, the number of times the "time-saving game" is performed is up to 100 times.

  The "small hit gaming state" is a gaming state in which the "small hit gaming" is performed, and is a gaming state in which the wing members 53a of the second big winning device 53 open and close. The “small hit game” is performed by winning the “small hit” by a lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting opening 45. As described above, even if the ball enters the first starting opening 44, it does not win a "small hit".

  When the game ball enters the second starting opening 45, the player wins "small hit" with a probability of 199/200 (see FIG. 34 (a)). If you win the "small hit", it will be "small hit gaming state". In addition, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the player wins the "small hit" by entering the second start opening 45, the small hit (2) -1 to 4 (2) -4 It is distributed to any of the special drawing types.

  The contents of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 are "16R per V". The "small hit game" in this case is an opening and closing operation in which the wing members 53a are opened three times. And the opening time per time of the blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds in the small hit (2) -1 and 1.2 seconds in the small hit (2) -2 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four gaming balls enter the second big winning device 53, the wing member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)) reference). Further, when it is detected in the second big winning device 53 that the four game balls have entered, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open even if the number of times the blade member 53a is not opened is three times. . A game ball entering the second big winning device 53 is paid out 15 per game.

  Also, if the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big prize device 53 in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, it becomes "per V," A 16 round "big hit game" will be played. However, in this case, since the opening and closing operation of the blade member 53a that triggered the entry into the V winning opening 57 is made the first round, the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 after entering the V winning opening 57. Perform the opening and closing operation of opening 15 times. As described above, a game that is started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". In this "big hit game", the opening time per shutter 54a is 27.966 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that ten gaming balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed. Then, 15 payouts are made per game ball entering the first big prize device 54.

  The expected value of small hit (2) -1 is 16%. That is, when a small hit game is determined, the probability of being a small hit (2) -1 is 16%. Moreover, the expected value of small hit (2) -2 is 17%. In addition, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 is performed, the "time-saving game" is performed. Here, the number of times the "time-saving game" is performed is up to 100 times. In addition, although "time saving game" may not be performed after "big hit game" of small hit (2) -1 and small hit (2) -2, it mentions it later.

  Moreover, the content of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 is "2R per V". The "small hit game" in this case is an opening and closing operation in which the wing members 53a are opened three times. And the opening time per time of the blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds in the small hit (2) -3 and 1.2 seconds in the small hit (2) -4 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four gaming balls enter the second big winning device 53, the wing member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)) reference). A game ball entering the second big winning device 53 is paid out 15 per game.

  Also, if the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53 in the "small hitting game" of the small hitting (2)-3 and the small hitting (2)-4, it becomes "per V," Two rounds of "big hit games" are played. However, in this case, since entering the ball into the V winning hole 57 is the first round, the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 opens and closes once after entering the V winning hole 57. As described above, a game that is started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". Although this "big hit game" is different from the "big hit game" of small hit (2) -1 and small hit (2) -2, the number of rounds is different, but the opening time, the number of payouts, etc. are the same.

  Expected value of small hit (2)-3 is 33%. Moreover, the expected value of small hit (2) -4 is 34%. In addition, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 is performed, the "time-saving game" is performed. Here, the number of times the "time-saving game" is performed is up to 100 times.

The "time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the "time-saving gaming" is performed, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is relatively high. That is, the "time saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric role piece 46 provided in the second starting opening 45 is likely to be in the open state (a gaming state in which the second starting opening winning is likely to occur). It is an advantageous gaming state. In addition, "time saving game state" ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), when it becomes "per V", or when it wins the "big hit" .
In the "time-saving game state", not only is the probability of winning a normal symbol relatively high, but the lottery time in the normal symbol game may be relatively short. In addition, the open time of the opening and closing operation of the normal motorized symbol 46 may be relatively long.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the "time-saving gaming state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is a high probability, which is 256/256. In the first embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed with a high probability of 256/256 in the "time-saving game state", but the lottery of the normal symbol may not be performed, and may always be a hit. Further, except for the "time-saving gaming state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is low, and 0/256, that is, the normal symbol is not won. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is performed with a low probability of 0/256 except for the “time-saving gaming state”, but the normal symbol lottery may not be performed and it may always be a loss.

  The “normal game state” is a game state in which the “normal game” is performed, and is a game state in which none of the “big hit game state”, the “small hit game state” and the “time saving game state” is performed.

  The transition operation between the various game states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 doubles as means for controlling the transition operation between the various gaming states.

[State transition of main control]
Transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of main control of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when a game is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is usually played in the "normal game state". Here, each time the first start hole 44 is won, a lottery process of a special symbol for the first start hole 44 is performed. However, as described above, since the normal game is not won in the normal game state, the normal electric jack 46 does not open, and the second starting opening 45 does not win.

  If the player wins the "big hit" when winning the first start opening 44, the "big hit gaming state" is entered. At this time, when the hit content is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, after the "big hit gaming state", it shifts to the "normal gaming state" (non-time big hit).

  In the “normal game state”, when winning in the first starting opening 44 and winning the “big hit”, the “big hit” if the hit content is the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7. After the game state, it shifts to the "time saving game state" (time stamp big hit). Specifically, when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43, the lottery process of the normal symbol is performed. In the "time-saving game state", the winning symbol lottery is won with high probability, so when the game ball passes the ball passing detector 43, the normal motorized role piece 46 is in the open state. If the game ball wins the second starting opening 45 when the ordinary electric role piece 46 is in the open state, the lottery process of the special symbol for the second starting opening 45 is performed.

  In the "time saving game state", it is preferable for the player that the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and therefore, the player preferably performs "right strike". Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform an effect such as prompting the player "right-handed" by display, sound or the like.

  If the player wins the "small hit" when winning the second starting opening 45, the "small hit gaming state" is entered, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member 53a is performed. When the wing member 53a is in the open state, the player wins a prize in the second big prize device 53, and when it is won in the V prize port 57, it shifts to the "big hit gaming state". Note that the number of round games varies depending on the hit content at this time. In the case of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, the blade content 53a in the second big winning device 53 when the hit content is "16R per V" and becomes "per V" Is in an open state, and 16 rounds of "big hit games" including this round are executed. Moreover, in the case of small hit (2) -3 and small hit (2) -4, the content of the hit is "2R per V," and the blade in the second big winning device 53 when it becomes "per V" The member 53a is in the open state as one round, and is two rounds including this round. In general, the larger the number of rounds, the more game balls will be paid out, so it is possible for the player to "per-V" in "per-V" for "16R per-V", "V It can be said that it is more advantageous than "per unit V" in per unit 2R "small hit".

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the round of the "big hit game" is shifted when the "small hit" is won when the "small hit" is won by satisfying the predetermined condition. Give a notification about the number. Thereby, the player is paid out in the "big hit gaming state" transitioning after the "V hit" by making a change to the game ball firing operation such as performing "stop" in accordance with the content of the notification. The game ball can be increased.

  Here, in the case of a time-time jackpot in the "normal game state", the "time-short game state" and the "big hit game state" are alternately shifted a predetermined number of times. In the first embodiment, after the "big hit gaming state" after the "normal gaming state", after the so-called "big hit gaming state" at the first hit, the "time saving gaming state" and the "big hit gaming state" are alternately alternated three times each. Migrate. In other words, "normal gaming state" → "big hit gaming state" → "time saving gaming state" → "big hitting gaming state" → "time saving gaming state" → "big hit gaming state" → "time saving gaming state" → "big hit gaming state" → Transition in the order of "normal gaming state". However, in the transition of these gaming states, for example, the game transitions to the “small hit gaming state” when the “small hit” is won in the “time saving gaming state”, but this “small hit gaming state” is omitted. ing. It should be noted that the "big hit gaming state" other than the "big hit gaming state" at the first hit is not necessarily triggered by the "V hit". That is, the "big hit gaming state" by the "big hit" of the special view (2) -1 shown in FIG. 34 is also included, and there is also a possibility of shifting to the "big hit gaming state" by this "big hit", for example.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a time-sourcing jackpot, in principle, four “big hit games” and three “time-short games” are performed. Regardless of the hit content in the "small hit" win in the third "time saving game state", after the subsequent "big hit gaming state" will not be "time saving game state" will be "normal gaming state" . In addition, regardless of the hit content in the "small hit" winnings in the first and second "time saving game states", after the "big hit gaming state", it becomes "time saving game state".

  In the special symbol lottery of the second starting opening 45, there is a case that the "big hit" is won without winning the "small hit", but also in this case, it shifts to the "big hit gaming state".

  Here, in the “time-saving game state”, the player is highly likely to be “right-handed”, and the possibility of winning in the first starting opening 44 is low. However, when the first starting opening 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, the number of rounds and the opening time are determined according to the content of the hit, and the "big hit game" is performed. In the first and second "time hit gaming state" in the "big hit" winning, even if the winning content is a special figure (1)-8-a special figure (1)-12 after the "big hit gaming state" Is a "time saving game state". In the third "time saving game state", when winning in the first starting opening 44 and winning a "big hit", "time hit" after the subsequent "big hit game state" regardless of which hit content Instead of being in the gaming state, it is in the normal gaming state.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the time game hits in the "normal game state", a set game is performed, but while the "time reduction game" is performed 100 times in the "time reduction game state", "V If the hit is not made, the "time-saving game state" is shifted to the "normal game state". However, in the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the second big winning device 53, it can be set by adjusting the opening timing of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57. Therefore, when the player performs a normal firing operation, there is a low possibility that the "V hit" will not be made while the "time-saving game" is performed 100 times. For example, when entering the second large winning device 53, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 may be about 2/3.
Specifically, the movable member 57a may perform the opening and closing operation until the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 starts to open. Then, by adjusting the timing at which the movable member 57a starts the opening operation, the opening time, etc., the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second big winning device 53 can be adjusted. . Thus, the probability may be about 2/3. For example, the time during which the movable member 57a is open may be approximately 2/3 of the time during which the blade member 53a is open.

[Sub control state transition]
Transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a state transition diagram of sub control of the pachinko gaming machine.

  Here, the "big hit" of the special view (1) -1 to the special view (1) -2 is a trigger for transition to the "big hit gaming state" where payout of gaming balls can be expected, so The decorative symbol to be displayed may be, for example, an arrangement of three identical numbers. Thereby, it can be understood that the player also shifts to the advantageous gaming state. For this reason, the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -2 may be referred to as "big match of symbols".

In addition, since the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-3-the special figure (1)-12 becomes a trigger for transition to the "big hit gaming state" where payout of gaming balls can not be expected, display is made in the display area 13a at this time. The decorative pattern to be made may be a line of different numbers. For this reason, the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -12 may be referred to as a "big hit that does not match the patterns."
The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 13a may be in such a mode that three symbols of the right symbol, the middle symbol and the left symbol are arranged, and the special figure (1)-3 to the special figure (1)-12 In the "big hit", the right symbol and the left symbol may be the same symbol, and a special symbol may be displayed for the middle symbol. It is possible to have a plurality of types of middle symbols that are special symbols, and the effect in "big hit" may be different depending on the middle symbols displayed. And, the rush expectation to “time saving game state” may be different depending on the difference of these effects. In this case, if the selection rates of the plurality of middle symbols are made different for each of the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -12, then the time-shorting intruding expectation is made different. Good. For example, the middle symbol is a symbol that draws a fortune, and it may be suggested to indicate a shift to a time-saving game by the fortune that has come out.

  As described above, the first embodiment has the “normal gaming state”, the “big hit gaming state”, and the “time saving gaming state”. As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal game state” and the “big hit game state” can be shifted to each other, and the “big hit game state” and the “time-saving game state” can be shifted to each other. There is also a "small hit gaming state", but it is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal gaming state” includes the “first high probability state”, the “second high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”. It is done. The "normal gaming state" also includes a "normal gaming state (sub)" which is a state other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state". As described above, in the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, notification regarding the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be shifted when the "per hit" is obtained when the "small hit" is won is performed. . It is necessary to determine a notification mode such as whether to perform this notification or the number of times of notification. The notification modes determined in each of the “first high probability state” to “fourth high probability state” and “normal gaming state (sub)” are different.

  First, each of the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state” will be described.

  In the “first high probability state”, when the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 is won and it shifts to the set game, 3 times of “executed in the set game” In all of the "time-saving game state", the number of rounds of "big hit game" to be shifted when "hit per V" is won when "small hit" is won is notified. That is, when the gaming ball has won the V winning opening 57, it is informed which of the 16 rounds "big hit game" and the 2 round "big hit game" is to be executed. In addition, when a set game is over and it transfers to a "normal game state", it will be in a "1st high probability state". In addition, if you win the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-8-the special figure (1)-12 and shift to the single hit "big hit gaming state" instead of the set game, the "big hit gaming state" "" Is switched to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is maintained.

  In the “first high probability state”, in the “normal gaming state” other than the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, in the “second high probability state” and the “normal gaming state (sub)” The points stored in accordance with the effects in the pachinko game (for example, in accordance with the result of the mini game) are shifted by reaching 100 points. And if it is digested 20 games in the "first high probability state", it shifts to the "second high probability state". Specifically, in the "first high probability state", when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 20 times, the state shifts to the "second high probability state".

  The “second high probability state” is a state where it is easy to shift to the “first high probability state”. That is, the “second high probability state” is a gaming state in which points serving as a trigger for transition to the “first high probability state” are easily accumulated compared to other gaming states. In addition, "big hit gaming state" when it is elected to "big hit" of special figure (1)-8-special figure (1)-12 and it shifts to the single hit "big hit gaming state" instead of the set game. When the "" is finished to shift to the "normal game state", it becomes the "first high probability state".

  As described above, if 20 games are digested in the "first high probability state", the "second high probability state" is entered. In addition, when 10 games are digested in the "second high probability state", the game shifts to the "normal gaming state (sub)" other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state".

In the “normal gaming state” other than the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, in the “second high probability state” and the “normal gaming state (sub)” In the case where the "big hit" in Fig. (1) -1 is won and it is shifted to the set game, the "small hit" is won in all of the three "time saving gaming states" executed in the set game. The number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when "per-V" is notified. When the player wins the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -2 to the special figure (1) -7 and shifts to the set game, the number of times of notification of the round number is determined by lottery. The lottery will be described later. In addition, when a set game is over and it transfers to a "normal game state", it will be in a "1st high probability state". In addition, if you win the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-8-the special figure (1)-12 and shift to the single hit "big hit gaming state" instead of the set game, the "big hit gaming state" When the "" is finished to shift to the "normal game state", it becomes the "first high probability state".

  The “third high probability state” is a gaming state (ceiling state) for activating a so-called ceiling function. The ceiling function is to provide advantageous benefits to the player, provided that the player continues to be at a disadvantage. Specifically, in the “third high probability state”, when winning in the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 and shifting to the set game, it is executed in the set game In all of the three "time saving gaming states", the number of rounds of "big hit gaming" to be shifted when "per hitting V" is won when "small hitting" is won is notified. After this set game ends, the state shifts to the “first high probability state”. Furthermore, in the "third high probability state", we win the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-8-the special figure (1)-12, and shift to the "big hit gaming state" of only one game instead of the set game In this case, when the "big hit gaming state" is ended and the transition to the "normal gaming state" is made, the "third high probability state" is maintained. The "third high probability state" is maintained until it is won by the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 and it shifts to the set game.

  As described above, the "third high probability state" is a gaming state for activating the ceiling function. Even when the game ball enters the first starting opening 44, if the state where it does not become the "big hit" continues, it shifts to the "third high probability state". In the first embodiment, the state in which the game ball does not become a "big hit" even when the game ball enters the first starting opening 44 is 111 games, 222 games, 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games When the 999 games continue, the ceiling lottery is performed by the sub CPU 201 each time, and when it is won, the state is shifted to the “third high probability state”. Details of the ceiling lottery will be described later.

  In addition, 111 games, 222 games, the state which does not win the "big hit" of special figure (1) -1-special figure (1) -7 even after it shifts to the "third high probability state" which is a ceiling state When 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games and 999 games continue, the sub CPU 201 may perform a ceiling lottery each time. When the player wins the game, the "third high probability state" may be accumulated and stored. That is, in the case where a plurality of "third high probability states" are stored, the player wins the "big hit" of special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7 and is executed three times in the set game In all of the "time saving gaming state", when you win the "small hit" "notice to V" notification of the number of rounds of "big hit game" to shift, store the "3rd high probability state" It should be possible to do as many times as possible. That is, when the "third high probability state" is accumulated and stored, the "third high probability state" is again shifted to after the set game is completed by the number of times the "third high probability state" is stored.

  In addition, after transitioning to the “third high probability state” that is the ceiling state, the number of games that do not win the “big hit” of Toku-zu (1) -1 – Toku-zu (1) -7 is counted, When transitioning from the "third high probability state" to the "normal gaming state" is started and counting of the number of games serving as the reference for the ceiling lottery is started again, after transitioning to the "third high probability state" The number of games may be counted by adding the number of games of.

  The "fourth high probability state" is for providing a benefit (Navi-day navigation) advantageous to the player all day. Specifically, in the "fourth high probability state", when winning in "big hit" of special figure (1) -1-special figure (1) -7 and it shifts to set game, it is executed in set game In all of the three "time saving gaming states", the number of rounds of "big hit gaming" to be shifted when "per hitting V" is won when "small hitting" is won is notified.

  In the "fourth high probability state", the "fourth high probability state" is maintained when the set game ends, and when the single "big hit gaming state" not transitioning to the "time saving game state" ends. Be done. Thus, in the case of transition to the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. Then, the "fourth high probability state" is maintained unless the work RAM 203 is cleared. Thus, in the "fourth high probability state", notification is made in all of the three "time saving game states" executed in the set game, and the "fourth high probability state" remains until the work RAM 203 is cleared. Since the information is maintained, the notification in the set game continues until the store is closed. Therefore, the above notification in the "fourth high probability state" is called navigation throughout the day.

The work RAM 203 is cleared by turning on the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the backup switch. The work RAM 203 is not cleared simply by turning the pachinko gaming machine 1 off. That is, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off due to the occurrence of an error, the work RAM 203 is not cleared, and the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. In addition, normally, the work RAM 203 is not cleared during business hours of the hall.
Here, when the work RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM clear flag is set, and if the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set is the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, the probability is 1/1. Wins the "4th high probability state" and shifts to the "4th high probability state". In addition, the RAM clear flag is turned OFF regardless of the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set. When the hit after that becomes the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, the "fourth high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/10, and the state shifts to the "fourth high probability state".
As described above, in order to shift to the "fourth high probability state", it is a condition that the work RAM 203 is cleared, but the power is turned on from the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1 without the work RAM 203 being cleared. It may be a condition that it has been turned on. That is, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the first hit is the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, the "fourth high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/1, It is also possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state”. It should be noted that the power ON flag may be set when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Then, the power on flag is turned off regardless of the first hit after the power on flag is set. If the hit after that is the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, win the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/10 and shift to the "fourth high probability state" It may be In this case, the “fourth high probability state” may be maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. In the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, it was decided to win the "4th high probability state" with a probability of 1/1 or 1/10, but in the "4th high probability state" The type of winning and the probability of winning can be set as appropriate.

  Next, transition between the “normal gaming state” and the “big hit gaming state” will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the “normal game state”, either “I hit a symbol match” (first big hit) or “I hit a symbol not match” (first hit), either Transition to "big hit gaming state". It should be noted that if the player wins "matching symbol", it shifts to the "big hit gaming state" of 5 rounds where payout of gaming balls can be expected, and if it wins "hit without symbols", payout of gaming balls can not be expected 5 Move to the "big hit gaming state" (second big hit state) of the round.

  And from the "normal gaming state" other than the "fourth high probability state", that is, from the "first high probability state" to the "third high probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub)", the special figure (1) -1 If the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -7, the set game is executed, and after the set game is finished, the state shifts to the "first high probability state".

  Also, from the "normal gaming state" other than the "third high probability state" and the "fourth high probability state", that is, from the "first high probability state", the "second high probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub)" If you move to the "big hit gaming state" in the "big hit" of the special figure (1)-8 to the special figure (1)-12, it becomes a single "big hit gaming state" without time reduction, this "big hit gaming state" After the completion of the transition to the "first high probability state". In addition, when it moves from "the third high probability state" to "big hit gaming state" in "big hit" of special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, single shot "big hit gaming state without time saving" After this "big hit gaming state" ends, the state shifts to the "third high probability state" again.

  When transitioning from "the fourth high probability state" to "the big hit gaming state", it shifts to the "4th high probability state" again after the set game ends or after the single "big hit gaming state" without time reduction ends.

  Next, the transition between the "big hit gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, when in the set game after the "big hit" by winning in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, or after "per V" in "small hit gaming state" When in the set game, transition from "big hit gaming state" to "time saving gaming state".

  The transition from the "time saving game state" to the "big hit gaming state" is a case where "per V" is made in the "time saving game state". At this time, if it wins the "big hit game" of 16 rounds, it shifts to the 3rd big hit state, and if it wins to the "big hit game" of 2 rounds, it shifts to the 4th big hit state. Furthermore, in the "time saving game state", also when winning the "big hit" by entering the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45 instead of the "V hit", "big hit game from the" time saving game state " Transition to "state". In this case, transition to the first jackpot state is made.

[Configuration of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

[Main change time determination table]
First, the main variation time determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 show examples of the main variation time determination tables 1 and 2 of the pachinko gaming machine.

  The main variation time determination table 1 is referred to when the player wins the loss or "small hit" in the special symbol game. The main variation time determination table 1 defines the relationship among the gaming state, the reach determination random number range, the effect selection random number range, the variation pattern, the variation pattern command, and the variation time.

  In the main variation time determination table 1, the gaming state is identified as a "time saving gaming state" (with time saving) and a state (time non-saving) other than the "time saving gaming state". Furthermore, it is divided into five of special figure (1) loss, small hitting (2) -1-small hitting (2) -4 as special figure classification.

  The random number range for reach determination defines whether or not the selected content is reach in the special figure type special figure (1) loss. Determine the fluctuation time for reach that determines fluctuation time for reach, and define the range of the random number for reach judgment that does not determine fluctuation time for reach. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the gaming ball wins the first and second starting openings 44 and 45 in each gaming state. The reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 250.

  As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the special figure (1) is a loss, and the gaming state at that time is not the short time gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the change time for reach is 0 to 250 Take a range of Furthermore, it is determined that the reach will occur when the reach determination random number range is any of 0 to 25, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number taking the range of 0 to 99 . By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time for reach (20000 ms, 30000 ms, 40000 ms) and the contents of the presentation ("lost normal reach", "lost super reach A" and "lost super reach B") are determined. Each of these reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the sub control circuit 200 determines the reach contents thereafter.

  In addition, when the special figure (1) is a loss, and the gaming state at that time is a short time gaming state, the fluctuation time (50000 ms) is set to be relatively long, but this is “time short gaming state In order to make it difficult for the player to draw the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol has priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide this data when it is a specification which does not have a reserve of a 2nd special symbol, it does not have this data.

  Here, if it is small hit (2)-1-small hit (2)-4 and the gaming state at that time is not short time gaming state, after "time shorting game" is performed 100 times, the second special symbol It is due to the reserve, and this is unlikely to occur. In this case, when "per unit V" is performed, it is preferable that, for example, a revival effect is performed such that the "time saving game" is performed again.

  The effect selection random number range defines the range for the reach determination random number range, the fluctuation time, and the effect selection random number range corresponding to the effect content. The effect selection random number value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) when the gaming ball wins the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45 in each gaming state. The effect selection random number value extracted from the main-side effect selection counter of the first embodiment is set to 0-99.

  For example, when the special figure (1) is a loss and the gaming state at that time is not the short time gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the change time for reach takes a range of 0 to 250. Furthermore, it is determined that the normal change is performed when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250, and the change pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number taking the range of 0 to 99 Ru. By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (10000 ms, 5000 ms) and the contents of the presentation (“normal fluctuation A” and “normal fluctuation B”) are determined. The sub control circuit 200 determines the contents of the effects after this.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing the contents of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern 02H represents a lost normal reach. The fluctuation pattern command is data representing whether it is winning or losing, the fluctuation time and the contents of the effect, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. When the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, a parameter specifying the gaming state is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main variation time determination table 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main variation time determination table 2 is referred to when a big hit is won in the special symbol game. The main variation pattern determination table 2 defines the relationship among the gaming state, the jackpot type, the effect selection random number range, the variation pattern, the variation pattern command, and the variation time.

In the main variation time determination table 2, the gaming state is the same as the main variation time determination table 1, "with time reduction" indicates that the time saving game state is when the big hit is won, and "with time reduction" is the big hit is won It shows that it is not a time saving game state when. The special drawing type is divided into thirteen special drawing (1) -1 to special drawing (1) -12 and special drawing (2) -1.
For example, the contents of the jackpot type when the special game (1) -2 is a big hit and the gaming state at that time is not the short time gaming state is when the payout is short (the gaming ball is paid out in the big hit gaming state) Expected, transition to short time gaming state after the big hit gaming state), the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number ranging from 0 to 99. By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (20100 ms, 30100 ms, 40100 ms) and the presentation contents ("per normal reach", "per super reach A" and "per super reach B") are determined. Each of these reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the sub control circuit 200 determines the reach contents thereafter.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the big hit is won, the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are reach effects regardless of whether they are in the short time game state or not in the short time game state. However, in the case of the special figure (1)-3 to the special figure (1)-12, an effect with no pop is performed. The special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are "pattern matching big hit", but the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -12 are "big hit not matching the pattern".

[Configuration of data table stored in sub ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43.

[Ceiling lottery table]
First, the ceiling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a view showing an example of a ceiling lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  The ceiling lottery table is used in the ceiling lottery described above. In the sub control circuit 200, after the end of the set game, the number of special symbol games (the number of times of variation display of special symbols) when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 44 and becomes a "big hit" is counted When the game is shifted to the set game, the count is reset and the number of special symbol games is counted again after the end of the set game. Then, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, 222 times, 333 times, 444 times, 555 times, 666 times, 777 times, 888 times and 999 times, a ceiling lottery is performed.

  Here, the range of random numbers in the ceiling lottery is 0-9. First, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111, the winning random number is 0-1. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 20%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 222, the winning random number is 0-2. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 30%. In addition, when the number of special symbol games counted reaches 333 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 3. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 40%. In addition, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 444 times, the winning random number is 0-4. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 50%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 555, the winning random number is 0-5. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 60%. In addition, when the number of special symbol games counted reaches 666 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 6. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 70%. In addition, when the number of special symbol games counted reaches 777 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 7. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 80%. In addition, when the number of special symbol games counted reaches 888 times, the winning random number is 0-8. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 90%. In addition, when the number of special symbol games counted reaches 999 times, the winning random number is 0-9. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery increases as the state of not winning the "big hit" continues. Then, when the number of special symbol games that do not win the "big hit" reaches 999 times, the ceiling lottery is always won. When the ceiling lottery is won, it shifts to the "third high probability state".

[Point addition table]
The point addition table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a view showing an example of a point addition table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, the “normal gaming state” other than the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, the “second high probability state” and the “normal gaming state (sub In the case of), points are accumulated according to the effect, and when 100 points are accumulated, the state shifts to the “first high probability state” (FIG. 36). In the "first high probability state", if you win the "big hit" ("match symbol big hit") of the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2, it is "per v" in "time saving gaming state" Notification (Navi) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be shifted is performed in all of the three "time-saving game states". Also, in the "first high probability state", of the "big hit" in the special figure (1) -3 and the special figure (1) -7 ("big hit with no symbol alignment"), transition to "time saving game state" Even when the jackpot is won, the notification (Navi) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game", which transitions when the "V hit" in the "time saving game state", is performed in all three "time saving game states" It will be. Therefore, it can be said that transition to the “first high probability state” is advantageous for the player. Note that, in the following, when simply referred to as "navi", it refers to notification of the number of rounds of "big hit game" that is shifted when the above "per-V" is made.

As described above, the "second high probability state" is a gaming state in which points are easily accumulated, and different point addition tables are used in the "second high probability state" and in other games. FIG. 40 (a) is a table used during the "second high probability state". Fig. 40 (a)
As shown in the following, when effects corresponding to “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H”, and “83H04H” are sent as variation pattern commands sent from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. The value of the added points varies depending on the lottery, but some points are added. That is, in the “second high probability state”, points are always added if there is a loss. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9, and the points to be added differ depending on the acquired random number value.

  In addition, the effect content corresponding to "83H00H" is "normal change A", the effect content corresponding to "83H01H" is "normal change B", and the effect content corresponding to "83H02H" is "losing normal reach" Yes, the contents of the effect corresponding to "83H03H" are "Nossle super reach A", and the contents of the effect corresponding to "83H04H" are "Noss super reach B" (see FIG. 37). In addition, in these effects, the point addition effect may be performed so that the player can recognize that the points are added. In addition, in "Holder Super Reach B", navigation can be acquired with a probability of 1/10.

  FIG. 40 (b) is a table used during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when effects corresponding to the variation pattern commands "83H00H", "83H01H", "83H02H", "83H03H" and "83H04H" are made, the value of the added points by lottery Is determined but points may not be added. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9 as in the “second high probability state”. As understood from FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), points are more easily accumulated in the “second high probability state” than in the normal state.

[No dispatch time short navigation lottery table]
A non-outfall time short navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a view showing an example of the pachinko gaming machine with no pop-out time short navigation lottery table.

  As described above, when the hit content is "with-or-with-out-hours short", with-or-without-with-days short navigation lottery is performed, and the number of times of navigation is determined according to the lottery. When the hit content is "No delivery time and time short", the special drawing type is a special drawing (1) -3 to a special drawing (1) -7. As shown in FIG. 41, the range of the random value is 0-9. In the special view (1) -3, when the acquired random number is “9”, one navigation is given, and the navigation is not given in other random numbers. In the special view (1) -4, when the acquired random number is “7 to 9”, one navigation is given, and the navigation is not given for other random numbers. In Special Figure (1) -5, when the acquired random number value is "7 to 9", two navigations are given, and in the case of "2 to 6", one navigation is given, and other randomness Navigation is not given in the numerical value. In the special view (1) -6, two navigations are given when the acquired random number value is “5 to 9”, and one navigation is given when “0 to 4”. In the special view (1) -7, three navigations are given when the acquired random number value is "9", and two navigations are given when "0 to 8". When the navigation is given, the navigation acquisition effect is executed. Further, the number of assigned navigations is updated (for example, added) and stored in the work RAM 203, for example.

[Big win when Navi lottery table]
The big hit navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a view showing an example of a big hit navigation lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the "normal game state", for "first high probability state", "third high probability state" and "fourth high probability state", it is won in "time with the ball out" and the transition to the set game is decided If the user has made a game, navigation is performed for all three "time-saving gaming states" (see S1127 in FIG. 72, S1164 in FIG. 74, and S1174 in FIG. 75). Further, in the special view (1) -1, navigation is performed for all of the three "time-saving gaming states" regardless of the gaming state. However, when the special figure (1) -2 is won in the "normal game state" except for the above-mentioned game state, the sub control circuit 200 draws the number of times of navigation during the set game. The big hit navigation lottery table is used for this lottery.

  The number of navis to be elected in the big hit navigation lottery and the probability of winning them differ depending on the selected character. The character is selected by the player from characters 1 to 3. It is selected by operating, for example, the effect button 23 after winning the "big hit" and until the one round game is started. If no character is selected before the one-round game is started, the initially set character is selected.

  The character is a character image displayed in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. There are a plurality of types of character images (three types in the first embodiment), and the player can select one of the characters, and can enjoy an effect corresponding to the selected character.

  In the big hit navigation lottery, the range of the random value is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 42, when character 1 is selected, it is “stable type” and 3 navigations can not be obtained, but 1 or 2 navigations can be obtained and navigation can not be obtained. There is no case. Moreover, when the character 2 is selected, it is a "normal type", and although navigation may not be able to be obtained in some cases, navigation can be obtained on average for each of 1 to 3 pieces. Further, when the character 3 is selected, it is "one shot reverse type", and there are always three when obtaining the navigation, but the navigation can not be obtained with a probability of 1/2 or more. The player may select a character according to his / her preference from among these. However, in each character, with regard to the number of navigations and the winning rate thereof, it is set such that no substantial advantage and disadvantage will occur regardless of which character is selected. Although the number of characters is three in the first embodiment, the number of characters may be other than this. By increasing the number of characters, the player's choice of character selection is broadened, and it is highly likely that the interest in the game will be improved.

[Navi lottery table at the end of set game]
The set lottery game end navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a view showing an example of the navi lottery table at the end of the set game of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, during the set game, three "time-saving game states" are included. That is, it is possible to execute navigation at most three times. However, if the player does not win the "big hit" due to the "V hit" but the "big hit" due to the special symbol game, the navigation can not be performed. In such a case, the player can not make an advantageous situation by his own operation. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a relief measure in such a case, navigation is given by lottery according to the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game during the set game.

  In the sub control circuit 200, when the set game is over, the navi lottery at the end of the set game is performed according to the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game in the set game.

  The range of the random number value is 0 to 9 in the navi lottery at the end of the set game. As shown in FIG. 43, the number of "big hit" in the special symbol game is randomly selected 0, 1, 2, 3 times, and the number of navigations to be awarded is determined. As the number of "big hit" in the special symbol game increases, the number of provided navigation tends to increase. Although the first embodiment is based on the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game during the set game, for example, the navigation is provided based on the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game over successive set games. It is also possible to draw a number. That is, during a plurality of consecutive set games, the number of navigation based on the number of times a "big hit" has been made by the lottery performed by the game ball entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 It may be a lottery.

  In addition, instead of the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game during the set game, for example, it is possible to draw the number of provided navigation based on the total number of rounds in all the "big hit gaming state" . In accordance with the gaming state in the set game, the number of navigations to be awarded may be made by lottery. For example, it is also possible to draw the number of navigations provided based on the type and order of "big hit game" in set games. For example, in the case of the order of 2R, 2R, 16R and in the order of 2R, 16R, 16R and 2R, the drawing rate of the number of provided navigation may be different from each other .

  In addition, during the set game, up to three "per V" is possible, but if all the results are per 2R, it is a very favorable result for the player because the number of game balls paid out is small. Absent. Therefore, in such a case, the number of navigations for the set game after the next time may be added (see S1210 in FIG. 77). The number to be added may be, for example, one. Further, the navigation number may be similarly added also when three 2Rs are continuously made over different set games instead of three 2Rs during one set game. In addition, in the case of extending over different set games, the navigation may be added when the number of consecutive 2Rs is 3 or more and the number of 2Rs continues more than that. Further, in the case where the number per 2R is a predetermined number or more in a plurality of consecutive set games, navigation may be added. As described above, some relief measures may be given to the game balls for which the number of payouts in the set game is small.

  Although the number of provided navigations has been described, the number of provided navigations may be displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 as an effect in, for example, the "big hit gaming state".

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, main control main processing under the control of the main CPU 71 will be described. FIGS. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of main processing executed by the main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine.

  In S11, disable setting processing of the watchdog timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the watchdog timer to be disabled. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S12, setting processing of input / output port is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an input / output port setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S13.

  In S13, processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure detection state is in effect. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S13. If the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the processing is performed at S14. If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S13 again, and this process is repeated until it is determined that the power failure is not detected.

  In S14, a sub control reception acceptance wait process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  At S15, the RAM write permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S16.

  In S16, processing is performed to determine whether the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on, the process proceeds to S24. If the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the process proceeds to S17. Transfer the process.

  In S17, it is determined whether the power failure detection flag is present. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the power failure detection flag is present, the process proceeds to S18, and when it is not determined that the power failure detection flag is present, the process proceeds to S24.

  In S18, a process of calculating a work damage check value is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs damage check of the work area and performs processing of calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S19.

  In S19, processing is performed to determine whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process proceeds to S20, and when it is not determined that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process proceeds to S24. Move.

  In S20, a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, an initialization process of the work area at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S22.

  In S22, processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 200 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 71. When this process is completed, the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  In S24, a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S25.

  In S25, processing is performed to obtain the initial value of the jackpot determination related random number. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of acquiring the initial value of the jackpot determination related random number. If this process ends, the process moves to S26.

  In S26, all work area clear processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the entire work area. If this process ends, the process moves to S27 (FIG. 45).

  In S27, processing is performed to set the initial value of the jackpot determination related random number. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S28.

  In S28, initialization of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 initializes the work area at the time of initialization of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S29.

  In S29, processing for transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 73 to the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 executes initialization based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S30.

  In S30, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 71. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, interrupt disable processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process to inhibit the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, an initial value random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, an interrupt permission process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for permitting interrupt processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, effect random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  At S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S36 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 If not, the process moves to S31.

  At S36, processing of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  At S37, a timer update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 counts a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and a large opening time for measuring the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. A process for updating various timers, such as a winning device opening time timer, is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, special symbol control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 performs special symbol control processing. The main CPU 71 extracts a random value for hit determination and a random value for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a, and stores it in the main ROM 72 It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) is won with reference to the hit determination table, and processing of storing the determination result in the main RAM 73 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, normal symbol control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the passing ball switch 43a, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 72, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won. A determination process is performed to store the determination result in the main RAM 73. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric role holder 46 is in the open state, and it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 45. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, symbol display device control processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control processing stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39 and the result of the normal symbol control processing. A process of storing a control signal for driving in the main RAM 73 is performed. The main CPU 71 transmits the control signal to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. The normal symbol display device 62 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, game information data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or hall computer, and stores the data in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S42.

  In S42, symbol holding number data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a first starting opening winning ball switch 44a, a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a, and a passing ball switch which are detected in switch input processing (FIG. 59, S235) in timer interrupt processing described later. Display of the suspension for the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the detection signal from the 43a and the update result of the pending number data stored in the main RAM 73 updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol The control signal for performing the control is stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of outputting control signals stored in the main RAM 73 in the above-described steps from each port. Specifically, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, and a solenoid power supply for driving the first large winning opening solenoid 54b, the second large winning opening solenoid 53b, and the ordinary electric role solenoid 46a are supplied. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, a winning opening related command control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  At S45, a payout process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game balls have won in the general winning openings 51 and 52, the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. A check is made, and if there is a prize, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout control circuit 300. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

[Special symbol control process]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in S38 of FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46, numerical values (00H to 10H) described in the vicinity of S52 to S62 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. There is. According to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73, the main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value, and the special symbol game proceeds.

  First, in S51, a process of loading a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S52.

  In addition, in S52 to S62 described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes in S52 to S62. In addition to that, the main CPU 71 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, the process ends without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In S52, special symbol memory check processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S53.

  In S53, special symbol fluctuation time management processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is the special symbol variation time management value (01H) and the predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation (When special symbol variation stops fluctuating), a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and a waiting time (for example, 600 ms) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the process of S54 is set to be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S54.

  In S54, a special symbol display time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is the special symbol display time management value (02H), and the wait time after confirmation has passed, the hit (big hit Or small hit). In the case of a small hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (03H) indicating small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed, the processing of S55 is set to be executed.

  In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed, the processing of S58 is set to be executed.

  Further, when the main CPU 71 is not a hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10 H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S62.

  In S55, small hit start interval management processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is a small hit start interval management value (03H) and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed. The data for opening the second big winning device 53 read from the main ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, the main CPU 71 reads the data for opening the second big winning device 53 stored in the main RAM 73 in the process of S43 of FIG. 45, and outputs a signal to the effect that the second big winning device 53 is opened. 2) Supply to the large winning prize outlet solenoid 53b. As described above, the main CPU 71 or the like performs opening / closing control of the second big winning device 53. That is, the "small hit gaming state" is executed.

  Furthermore, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating a small hit in the control state flag, and opens the upper limit opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds or 1.2 seconds) of the second big winning device 53 as the second Set to the special winning device opening time timer. In addition, it sets up to execute processing of S56. If this process ends, the process moves to S56.

  In S56, the small hit middle process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a special winning opening open process (07H) or a small hit end post process (05H) in the control state flag according to the condition. If this process ends, the process moves to S57.

  In S57, a small hit end post process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may enter the V winning hole 57 in the second big winning device 53 after closing the wing member 53a. . In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S58.

  In S58, a big hit start interval management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management, and the main hit is when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed. Data for opening the first big winning device 54 read from the ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, the main CPU 71 reads out the data for opening the first big prize device 54 stored in the main RAM 73 in the process of S43 of FIG. 45, and outputs a signal indicating that the first big prize device 54 is opened. (1) Supply to the large winning prize outlet solenoid 54b. As described above, the main CPU 71 or the like performs opening / closing control of the first big winning device 54. That is, the "big hit gaming state" is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing in the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time limit (for example, 27.96 seconds or 0.102 seconds) as the special winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S59. If this process ends, the process moves to S59.

  In S59, a special winning opening opening process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, the big winning opening winning counter is “10” or more It is determined whether any one of the condition that the open upper limit time has passed (the special winning opening open time timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 71 updates the variable located in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big winning device 54 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is equal to or greater than the maximum value (which is the final round). The main CPU 71 sets the value (09H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the final round, while the value (08H) indicates the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening while it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S60.

  In S60, a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is the value (07H) indicating the big winning opening reopening wait time management, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. Then, the special winning opening open frequency counter is memorized and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 71 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 27.969 seconds or 0.102 second) in the special winning opening open time timer, that is, sets to execute the process of S59. If completed, the process moves to S59.

  In S61, hit end interval processing is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 controls the control status flag to have a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval, and the special symbol game is executed when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. A value (10H) indicating end is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, special symbol game end processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control status flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. . That is, it is set to execute the process of S52. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H” in order when the result of the hit determination is loss, as shown in FIG. , S53, S54, and S62 are executed at predetermined timings.

  Further, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit when the main CPU 71 is not a big hit or a small hit gaming state, the control status flag is set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "06H" in order. Thus, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S58 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the big hit gaming state is executed. Furthermore, when control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “07H” and “08H” in order, and thus the processing of S59 and S60 shown in FIG. 46 is specified. It will be executed at the timing of and the big hit game will be executed. In addition, when the termination condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the processing of S59, S61, and S62 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing by setting “07H”, “09H”, and “10H” in order. , Will end the jackpot game.

  Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit when the main CPU 71 is not a big hit or a small hit gaming state, the control status flags are set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" in order. By doing this, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S55 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the small hit gaming state is executed. Furthermore, when control to the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 executes the processing of S56 shown in FIG. 46 at a predetermined timing by setting the control state flag to “04H”. You will be playing a big hit game. In addition, when the termination condition of the small hit game is satisfied, the processing of S57 and S62 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing by setting “05H” and “10H” in order, and the small hit game is performed. It will end.

  By the way, in the special symbol control process, as described above, the process is branched according to the status. Also, although not described in detail, the normal symbol control process is also branched according to the status.

[Special symbol memory check process]
The subroutine (special symbol storage check process) executed in S52 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 47, in S71, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S72. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 does not determine that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S72, processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of start storage. Here, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol during the change is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 73, and the four special symbol games are held. The information of is stored as start storage in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, regarding the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is main The information on the four special symbol games stored as starting memory in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the RAM 73 and held is the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage It is stored as start memory in area (4). Therefore, it is possible to hold up to eight times.

  When the main CPU 71 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game in the process of determining the start memory of S72, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4 Or) if it is determined that data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S73. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is start memory, the process proceeds to S74.

  In S73, a demonstration display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. Furthermore, the state where the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area where the random number for hitting determination is stored) becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) If it is, set a value to allow execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 71 performs processing of setting demo display command data. The demo display command data stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as a demo display command. By this, in the sub control circuit 200, control for displaying a demonstration display in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is performed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S74, it is determined whether the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is the first hold. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether the first hold is the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol from the data of the first special symbol start storage area and the data of the second special symbol start storage area. Determine. If it is determined that the first suspension is not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S75. If it is determined that the first hold is the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S76.

  In S75, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S76, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  At S77, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S78.

  In S78, special symbol storage transfer processing is executed. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 conducts the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), Execute processing to shift (store) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol Each of the data of the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the symbol start storage area (1) is shifted (stored) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) Execute the process to If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, a hit determination process is performed. In this process, main CPU 71 refers to the hit determination table stored in main ROM 72, and is extracted at the start winning prize, and first in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0) Refer to the hit determination random number value of the special symbol starting storage area set in and the hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, the main CPU 71 determines that a big hit or a small hit is made. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to set the "big hit gaming state" and whether to set the "small hit gaming state". In addition, when it is not a "big hit" and a "small hit", it determines with it being a loss. If this process ends, the process moves to S80.

  At S80, the main CPU 71 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a small hit, neither a big hit nor a small hit In the case of a loss, ie, in the case of a loss, processing is performed to determine the lost symbol. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  At S81, the main CPU 71 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects the main variation time determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol decided in the process of S80 and the result of the hit determination decided in the process of S79. Do. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, the main variation time determination table 2 of FIG. 38 is selected, and otherwise, the main variation time determination table 1 of FIG. 37 is selected. Further, the main CPU 71 executes the fluctuation pattern based on the random number for reach judgment extracted from the random number counter for reach judgment, the random number for effect selection extracted from the random number counter for effect selection, and the selected main fluctuation time determination table. It decides and memorizes in the specified territory of main RAM73. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

  Data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 displays the variation pattern in which the special symbol is determined. Further, data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as a variation pattern command. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, special symbol fluctuation time setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S83.

  In S83, a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73 is performed. The special symbol presentation start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts rendering based on the received special symbol rendering start command. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  Then, in S84, the main CPU 71 executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display of this time. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in S80 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S91, the main CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether or not a big hit as a result of the hit determination (S79). If it is determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to S92. If not determined to be a big hit, the process moves to S97.

  At S92, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the change state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S93. If it is not determined that the change state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S95.

  In S93, processing is performed to determine a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the first special symbol, and makes a stop display in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S95, processing is performed to determine the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S96, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S97, when the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit as a result of the hit determination (S79), the process proceeds to S98. If it is not determined to be a small hit, the process moves to S100.

  In S98, a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determining counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S99. In the first embodiment, it is only the second special symbol that wins the "small hit".

  In S99, a data set of small hit symbols of the second special symbol and a command set of small hit symbols are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. Also, the main CPU 71 sets the small hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. . As a result, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the display area 13a in the small hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S100, the data set of the lost symbol and the command set of the lost symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol, and causes the special symbol display device 61 to stop and display the special symbol based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designating command. As a result, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the lost stop display mode. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) executed in S53 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S101, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and determines that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management If YES in step S102, the process proceeds to step S102. If it is not determined that the value is the special symbol variation time management value (01H), the present subroutine ends.

  In S102, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”, and when it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0”, the processing is shifted to S103. If it is not determined that the waiting time timer is "0", this subroutine is ended.

  In S103, processing is performed to set a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, after determination, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of storing the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
A subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in S54 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S111, the main CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S112. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S112, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0" when the control status flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. judge. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine ends.

  At S113, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred. If it is a big hit, the process moves to S119. If not a big hit, the process moves to S114.

  At S114, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S115. If not a small hit, the process proceeds to S124.

  In S115, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the small hit in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be 5000 ms, for example. If this process ends, the process moves to S117.

  In S117, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S118.

  In S118, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or small hit start. . When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S119, the main CPU 71 executes processing to set a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S120.

  At S120, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to turn off (clear) the time saving flag of the main RAM 73. In the "big hit gaming state", "time saving game" is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the number of consecutive short times is not cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S121, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the big hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is determined with reference to the open pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (d), and is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, thereby the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 201 of will recognize the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the big hit start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit start. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S124, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (small hit start interval management process) executed in S55 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description, the "big winning opening open number counter" in S133, S134, S144, and S145 is the "big winning opening opening number counter" used at the time of a small hit, and S151, S173, S174, S178, S187, S187, The "big winning opening opening number counter" in S203 is a "big winning opening opening number counter" used at the time of a big hit.

  First, in S131, the main CPU 71 executes a process to determine whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S132. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management process is “0”, that is, whether the small hit start interval time has been consumed. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine ends.

  In S133, processing is performed to set the large winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value related to the opening frequency of the second large winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the upper limit is limited to 3 (see FIG. 34 (d)). If this process ends, the process moves to S134.

  In S134, the main CPU 71 adds one to the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

  In S135, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting an open / close pattern for each open frequency corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 in accordance with the open pattern table shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the opening time for each opening number is set in the same manner. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open display command data for the second large winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening open display command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening open display command under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value (04H) indicating the small hit middle processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter relating to the number of winnings of the second large winning device 53. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73 for the opening time of the second big winning device 53. The waiting time may be, for example, 1200 ms or 1500 ms. If this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S140, the main CPU 71 sets a movable member in-progress flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 indicating whether or not the movable member 57a is activated to be open with respect to the operation of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57. Do the processing. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit middle processing]
The subroutine (small hit / medium hit processing) executed in S56 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S141, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit middle processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hit middle process, the process proceeds to S142. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hit middle processing, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S142, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening counter of the second large winning device 53 is 4 or more. Here, before the second big winning device 53 is opened four times, the four game balls may enter and the big winning opening counter may count four or more. That is, as in one round in the case of a big hit, every time the second big winning device 53 is opened once, the number of gaming balls entering the big winning opening counted by the big winning counter is determined. Unlike a single small hit, the total number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening counted by the large winning counter is determined regardless of the opening count of the second large winning device 53. When the special winning opening counter is 4 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148. If the special winning opening counter is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit medium process is “0”. That is, it is determined whether the waiting time timer has become 0 and the opening time or closing time of the second big winning device 53 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S147.

  In S144, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or higher than the special winning opening open frequency upper limit value set in S133. That is, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open counter has reached 3 times the number of times of opening of the second large winning device 53 set in S133. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 148 when the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or higher than the special winning opening opening frequency upper limit value. If the special winning opening open frequency counter is not equal to or higher than the special winning opening open frequency upper limit value, the process proceeds to S145.

  In S145, if the current time is closed, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening open number counter. That is, when the special winning opening open frequency counter is not equal to or higher than the special winning opening opening frequency upper limit, the "small hit gaming state" is continued, and the second big winning device 53 in the closed state is opened later, In order to determine the opening number of the second large winning device 53 of the large winning opening opening number counter, 1 is added to the large winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 71 sets the next open / close mode data and the open / close timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. That is, the open / close mode data of the second big winning device 53 which is in the open state or the closed state, and the open / close timer are set here again. If this process ends, the process moves to S147.

  At S147, main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V prize flag relating to a prize winning on V prize mouth 57. If there is a V prize flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. If there is no V prize flag, this subroutine is ended.

  In S148, when the main CPU 71 determines that the big winning counter for the second big winning device 53 is 4 or more in S142, or in S144, the big winning opening open frequency counter sets the big winning opening set in S133. If it is determined that the number of times of release is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the number of times of opening, processing for clearing the waiting time timer corresponding to the processing during small hit is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S149.

  At S149, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V prize flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. If there is no V prize flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S156.

  In S150, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening open process (07H) in the control state flag. That is, at S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a V prize flag, preparation of a "big hit game" started from "per V" is started. When this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, the special winning opening open frequency counter is set to 2. In this process, as described above, the "big hit game" started from "V hit" is the first round of opening of the second big winning device to be entered into the V winning hole 57, and the subsequent "big hit game" Is a process that occurs when the opening of the second big winning device is the second round. When this process ends, the process moves to S152.
In S152, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the large winning opening opening frequency counter upper limit value regarding the first big winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In this case, the big winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value is set to "2" or "16" depending on the hit content of the small hit that triggered the V hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the start interval time per V. Note that this time may be the same as the inter-round interval, for example, 5000 ms. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  At S154, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for turning off the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a start command per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S156, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the value (05H) indicating the small hit end post-processing to the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S157.

  In S157, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the small hitting end residual ball monitoring time. This time may be, for example, 5000 ms. This process is a process necessary to confirm that there is no gaming ball which may enter the V winning hole 57 in the second big winning device 53 after closing the wing member 53a. is there. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit end post processing]
The subroutine (small hit termination post-processing) executed in S57 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S161, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the small hit end post-processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the small hitting end post-processing, the process proceeds to S162. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the small hit end post-processing, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the small remaining ball residual ball monitoring time timer value is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the small hitting end residual monitoring time is digested. When the value of the timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S164. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. It is determined at this timing whether or not the V prize flag is present, and for example, even if the fraudulent action in which the V prize flag is intentionally made is performed at other timings, the determination of the V prize flag is It does not happen. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150 of FIG. If there is no V prize flag, this subroutine is ended.

  In S164, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  At S165, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in S58 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit start interval management process, as shown in FIG. 54, in S171, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating a big hit start interval management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S172. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S172, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the big hit start interval management process is “0” when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process. Do. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of S173, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the present subroutine ends.

  In S173, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the large winning opening opening frequency counter upper limit value regarding the first big winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, since the "big hit game" based on the special symbol is all 5 rounds, the big winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value is set to "5". If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S174, the main CPU 71 executes a process of adding one to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S175.

  In S175, the main CPU 60 sets an open / close pattern for each round corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 with reference to the open pattern table of FIG. 34 (d). In the first embodiment, the opening and closing patterns are set to be different depending on the type of the big hit symbol, and two patterns of the winning opening opening time of 27.966 seconds or 0.102 seconds are set as the opening and closing patterns. However, the opening and closing patterns corresponding to each round are set the same regardless of differences. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening open display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Big winning opening opening process]
The subroutine (big winning opening opening process) executed in S59 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the special winning opening opening process, as shown in FIG. 55, in S181, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S182. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S182, it is determined whether the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the process proceeds to S185, and the main winning opening winning counter is not determined to be "10" or more. The process moves to S183.

  In S183, a special winning opening opening / closing process is performed according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of opening and closing the first big prize device 54 in accordance with the opening and closing pattern for each round set in S175. Specifically, according to the opening and closing pattern for each round, processing is performed to wait for time and close and open the first big prize device 54. If this process ends, the process moves to S184.

  In S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening open time timer is "0". If the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer in the predetermined area functioning as the special winning opening open time timer in the main RAM 73 is “0”, the process proceeds to S185 and the waiting time timer is “0”. If not determined, the present subroutine ends. That is, when it is determined that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, or when it is determined that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S185, and the special winning opening winning counter This subroutine is ended when it is not determined that is greater than "10" and when it is not determined that the special winning opening open time timer is "0".

  In S186, processing is performed to set the big winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way causes the first large winning opening solenoid 54b to be in a closed state by the process of S43 of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S187.

  In S187, it is determined whether the special winning opening open frequency counter is greater than or equal to the special winning opening open frequency upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 71 compares the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit value or more, and the large winning opening opening number counter is the large winning opening opening number upper limit value It is determined whether it is above or not. If it is determined that the special winning opening open frequency upper limit value or more, the processing moves to S191, if it is not determined that it is not lower than the special winning opening opening frequency upper limit, the processing is moved to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73 as the inter-round interval time and the residual ball monitoring time. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (08H) indicating the waiting time pre-reopening wait time management process in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S190.

  In S190, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting inter-round display command data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S191, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a waiting time timer as a big hit end interval time and a remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag in the predetermined area which functions as the control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting an interval end display command data per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
The sub-routine (waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening) executed in S60 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control status flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time pre-reopening wait time management process in S201 as shown in FIG. 56. Perform processing to determine whether When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening, the process proceeds to S202. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, the present subroutine is ended.

  Whether the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval time is “0” when the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening in S202 It judges whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of S203, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the present subroutine ends.

  In S203, the main CPU 71 executes processing for adding one to the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening open display command data in this case is data indicating the second round and thereafter. The special winning opening open display command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening display command. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform round counter +1. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S205.

  In S205, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S206.

  At S206, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to clear the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S207, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval process) executed in S61 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S211, the main CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, the process proceeds to S212. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S212, when the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. Do. That is, it is determined whether the big hit end interval time is consumed and the value of the waiting time timer becomes "0". If the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S213, and if the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S213, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time-saving winning. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S215 if the time-saving winning is made. If it is not a short time winning, the process proceeds to S219.

  At S215, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving continuous counter is 0. If the short duration time counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S216. If the short duration continuous counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S217. Note that the time-saving continuous counter is provided to count the number of "time-saving gaming states" in the set game. If the time saving continuous counter is 0, for example, it indicates that the "big hit" from the "normal game state", so-called "first hit", "time saving game" has not yet been performed in the set game, and thereafter , Indicates that the first "time-saving game" will be performed.

  At S216, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving gaming state", and sets the time saving continuous counter to one. In addition, 0 is set to the time saving number counter. The time saving number counter is for counting the number of times of "time saving game", and "time saving game" of up to 100 times is possible in "time saving game state". When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  At S217, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving continuous counter is four. That is, the "big hit" is performed four times including the "first hit", and it is determined whether it is the third "time-saving gaming state" during the set game. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S219 if the short-time continuity counter is four. If the short duration continuous counter is not 4, the process moves to S218.

  In S218, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and adds 1 to the time saving continuous counter. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  At S219, the main CPU 71 sets the "normal game state". When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in S62 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at S221, the main CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S222. If it is not determined that the control state flag is not the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the present subroutine is ended.

  At S222, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V prize flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S223. If there is no V prize flag, the process proceeds to S224.

  In S223, the V prize flag is turned off. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving number counter is 1 or more. When the time saving number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S225. If the time saving number counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. Since “0” is set in the time reduction counter at S216 after “big hit” from the “normal game state”, the time reduction counter counts the number of “time reduction games” at S224 in S224, so S228 Transfer the process to

  At S225, the main CPU 71 increments the time saving number counter by one. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving number counter is 100 or more. If the main CPU 71 determines that the time saving number counter is 100 or more, the process proceeds to step S227. If it is determined that the time saving number counter is not 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. In S226, for example, if it is determined that the time saving number counter is 100 or more, and it does not become "per V" during the "time reducing game" 100 times, the processing is shifted to S227.

  In S227, the time saving number counter and the time saving continuous counter are cleared, and the time saving flag is turned off (cleared). If this process ends, the process moves to S228.

  In S228, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Even when the main CPU 71 is executing the main processing, the main CPU may interrupt the main processing and execute the system timer interrupt processing. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S231, register save processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  At S232, the timer is updated. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  At S233, processing is performed to set clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75 (see FIG. 33). The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the main CPU 71 System reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number counter, a reach determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect selection random number counter. In addition, since the big hit judgment random number counter and the reach judgment random number counter become unfair when the update timing of the counter value is unfixed, the timing is decided every 2 msec to secure this. I am trying to update. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, switch input processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 71 includes the count switch 54c and the count switch 53c provided in the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53, and the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a provided in the general winning openings 51 and 52, , A passing ball switch 43a provided in the ball passing detector 43, a first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a provided in the first starting opening 44 and the second starting opening 45, By receiving a detection signal from the V winning hole winning ball switch 57c provided in the V winning hole 57, it is determined whether each switch has detected a game ball. When the main CPU 71 determines that it has been detected, it updates the special winning opening prize ball counter, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the starting opening prize ball counter, the V award ball counter, and the like according to the detection. Details of the switch input process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, a movable member control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls the movable member 57a. Details of this control will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  At S237, a register recovery process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input process of S235 shown in FIG. 59 will be described using FIG.

  In S241, a winning ball related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the count switches 54c and 53c, the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a are input, in other words, the gaming ball It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 71 determines that the count switches 54c and 53c have been input, it performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening prize ball counter, and that the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a are input. When it is determined, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning a prize winning ball counter is performed, and when it is determined that there is an input of the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a, A process of adding one to the value of the starting mouth prize ball counter is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, special symbol related switch check processing is performed. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S243.

  In S243, a normal symbol related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing ball switch 43a, in other words, whether or not the gaming ball has been detected, and when it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example, If it is determined that the upper limit is set, the present subroutine is ended. When it is not determined that it is the upper limit, the random number value for hitting determination is extracted from the random number counter for hitting determination of the normal symbol game, and the random value for hitting symbol determination is extracted from the random number counter for hitting symbol determination. It performs processing to be stored in the normal symbol storage area. If this process ends, the process moves to S244 if the process ends.

  In S244, V switch check processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the V winning hole winning ball switch 57c, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and determines that the V winning flag has been received. Perform processing to turn on. When this process is completed, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is on only at the time of "small hit", and even if the V prize flag is on at other times. , And is cleared in the special symbol game end process 00H (see FIG. 46). If this process ends, the process moves to S245.

  In S245, an abnormality related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the abnormality related switch, for example, whether it is detected that the open / close switch of the glass door 11 is open and the glass door 11 is open. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the signal from the count switch 54c is detected in the state where the signal that the first big winning device 54 is in operation is not transmitted. If an abnormality is detected, processing for notifying an abnormality is performed, and if no abnormality is detected, the present subroutine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
The special symbol related switch check process of S242 shown in FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S251, processing is performed to determine whether or not the start winning for the first start opening 44 has been detected. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the first starting hole winning ball switch 44a. If it is determined that there is an input of the first starting hole winning ball switch 44a, the process proceeds to S252, and if it is not determined that there is an input of the first starting hole winning ball switch 44a, the process proceeds to S257.

  In S252, it is determined whether or not the starting memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the start-up storage of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is four or more. If it is determined that the pending number is 4 or more, the present subroutine is ended, and if it is determined that the pending number is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S253.

  In S253, a process of adding one to the start storage of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of adding one to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S254.

  In S254, various random number value acquisition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a big hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the big hit determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts a reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter Then, the effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73. In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment results based on the random number for collision judgment stored in are derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random number values acquired by having a start prize during the fluctuation of the special symbol are the first special symbol starting memory area (1) The first special symbol start storage area (4) is sequentially stored. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S255, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S256.

  In S256, the main CPU 71 sets the first starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The first start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 receives the first start opening win and the hit lottery result. Become aware of The data of the first starting opening winning command, when it is determined to be a winning effect in the process of S255, includes data for performing a winning effect, for example, effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed effect . As a result, a so-called "preread effect", which is a well-known technology, can be performed, such as performing effects based on start memory information before the execution of fluctuation. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S257, processing is performed to determine whether or not the start winning for the second start opening 45 has been detected. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the second starting hole winning ball switch 45a. If it is determined that the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, the process proceeds to S258. If it is not determined that the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, the present subroutine ends.

  In S258, processing is performed to determine whether or not the starting memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the second special symbol start storage, that is, the number of holdings is four or more. If it is determined that the pending number is 4 or more, the present subroutine is ended, and if it is determined that the pending number is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, a process of adding one to the start storage of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of adding one to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves on to S260.

  In S260, various random number values are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the big hit determination random number for the special symbol game from the big hit determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter Then, the effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73. In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol start storage area (0) The judgment result based on the big hit judgment random number stored in is derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random number values acquired by having a start winning during the fluctuation of the special symbol are the second special symbol start storage area (1) to The second special symbol start storage area (4) is sequentially stored. If this process ends, the process moves to S261.

  In S261, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning effect is to be performed. When it is determined that a winning effect is to be made, winning effect command data for causing an effect such as changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed is, for example, being stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The prize effect command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a prize effect command under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the contents of the prize effect. As a result, so-called "pre-reading effect" is possible, in which the effect is executed based on the start memory information before the change execution. If this process ends, the process moves to S262.

  In S262, the main CPU 71 sets a second starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The second start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 receives the second start opening win and the hit lottery result. Become aware of The data of the second starting opening winning command, when it is determined in the process of S261 to be a winning effect, includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed effect . As a result, so-called "pre-reading effect" is possible, in which the effect is executed based on the start memory information before the change execution. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, various commands set in the main RAM 73 of the main control circuit 70 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 70.

[Movable member control processing]
The movable member control process of S236 shown in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S271, the main CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hitting medium process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hit middle process, the process proceeds to S272. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hit middle process, the process proceeds to S274.

  In S272, it is determined whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 57a is operating. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the in-motion flag is present, the present subroutine is ended, and if it is determined that the in-motion flag is not present, the process proceeds to S273.

  In S273, the movable member 57a is started to be operated, and a process of turning on the movable flag is performed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S274, the main CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the small hit end post-processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the small hitting end post-processing, the process proceeds to S275. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the small hit end post-processing, the process proceeds to S277.

  In S275, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the small hitting end residual ball monitoring time is zero. When the main CPU 71 determines that the small hitting end residual ball monitoring time is 0, the processing is shifted to S 276. When it is determined that the small hit end residual ball monitoring time is not 0, this subroutine is ended. In the first embodiment, the small hit end residual ball monitoring time is 5000 msec, and since “V prize winning” is effective until 5000 msec elapses, the movable member can also move.

  In S276, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a, and turns off the movable flag. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, when the small hit end residual ball monitoring time 5000 msec has elapsed, the moving flag is turned off, and the “small hit gaming state” is ended.

  At S277, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S278. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the present subroutine is ended.

  At S278, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to determine whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the in-motion flag is not present, the present subroutine ends, and if it is determined that the in-motion flag is present, the process proceeds to S279. If the "V winning" in the "small hit", the in-motion flag is on, so the process proceeds to S279, and in the case of a mere "big hit", the present subroutine ends.

  In S279, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and performs a process of turning off the movable flag. That is, in the "big hit game", the movable member 57a does not have to operate. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Description of operation of sub control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 80. FIG.

[Sub control main processing]
The sub control main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processing such as display processing. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In S1011, an initialization process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization setting process in response to power on. For example, the power on flag is turned on. If this process ends, the process moves to S1012. This initialization process can also be performed according to the power on / off operation.

  In S1012, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random numbers stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1013.

  In step S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 210. This process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1014, effect control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control or the like of the mini game using the effect button 23. Moreover, you may perform prefetch holding | preventing production control etc. regarding a holding ball by the above-mentioned so-called pre-reading effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1015, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for performing display on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205. In the display control circuit 205, the VDP (not shown) controls various data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on data for displaying the effect image under control of the sub CPU 201. Are read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. If this process ends, the process moves to S1016.

  In S1016, control processing such as sound and lamp is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 executes voice control processing for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 11 and lamp control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process ends, the process is moved to the random number update process (S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub control main process shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub control main process may be interrupted to execute the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1021, a process of saving a register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1022.

  In S1022, a timer update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 210. Specifically, processing is performed to update a timer such as a round effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1023.

  In S1023, an effect button switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of the input of the effect button switch 23 a by the operation of the effect button 23. For example, the operation of the effect button 23 for selecting a character during the big hit game is detected. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024. Although this effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, another interrupt may be performed. Note that the lottery pattern of the navigation may be changed or the like depending on the selected character. For example, the average number of navigation provided may be changed depending on the selected character.

  In S1024, processing is performed to restore the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the values saved in S1021 to the respective registers. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

Command interrupt processing
Even in the state in which the sub control main process shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub control main process may be interrupted to execute the command interrupt process. The command interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1031, a process of saving a register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1032.

  In S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of storing the received command in the buffer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1033.

  In S1033, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the value saved in S1031 to each register. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

Command analysis processing
The subroutine (command analysis processing) executed in S1013 of FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

  In S1041, processing is performed to determine whether a command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and when it is determined that the received command exists, the process proceeds to S1042 and the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command exists. If not, this subroutine ends.

  At S1042, processing is performed to determine whether the received command is a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a special symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to S1043. If it is not determined that it is a special symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to S1044.

  In S1043, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol effect start command includes data relating to a game state, a fluctuation pattern, a special symbol, and a short time remaining, so-called navigation lottery or the like. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined that the command is the symbol stop command, the process proceeds to S1045. If it is not determined that the command is the special symbol effect stop command, the process proceeds to S1046.

  In S1045, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon symbol stop command reception. For example, processing such as stopping the decorative symbol in synchronization with the stopping of the special symbol by the control of the main control circuit 70 is performed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether the received command is a big hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to S1047. If it is not determined that the command is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to S1048.

  In S1047, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving a big hit start command. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1047, for example, in response to a big hit start command, a mini game or the like with an operation of the effect button 23 by the player is executed before the "big hit game" is started. Details will be described later.

  In S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1049. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1050.

  In S1049, the sub CPU 201 performs small hit start command reception processing. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not the received command is a start command per V command. If it is determined that the command is a V start command, the process proceeds to S1051. If it is not determined that the V start command is performed, the process proceeds to S1052.

  In S1051, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving a start command per V. In S1051, for example, subtraction processing of navigation by execution of navigation is performed. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether the received command is a small hit end command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1053, and if it is not determined that the small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1054.

  In S1053, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when a small hit end command is received. In S1053, for example, an effect corresponding to whether or not the result when the navi effect is executed is "per V" is performed. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not the received command is the special winning opening open display command. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command is determined, the process proceeds to S1055. If the large winning opening open display command is not determined, the process proceeds to S1056.

  In S1055, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving a special winning opening open display command. In S1055, for example, processing for displaying the result of the mini game displayed in S1047 is performed. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether the received command is an inter-round display command. If it is determined that it is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1057. If it is not determined that it is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1058.

  In S1057, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when an inter-round display command is received. The inter-round display command includes data on an inter-round performance and the like. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1058, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not the received command is a special symbol hit interval end display command. If it is determined that it is the special symbol hit interval end display command, the process proceeds to S1059, and if it is not determined that it is the special symbol hit interval end display command, the process proceeds to S1060.

  In S1059, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon reception of a special symbol interval end display command. In S1059, processing such as performing so-called navigation lottery is performed when the "time-saving game state" in the set game reaches a predetermined number of times. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1060, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon reception of another command. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Process when special symbol production start command is received]
The subroutine (processing when receiving special symbol rendering start command) executed in S1043 of FIG. 66 will be described using FIG.

  In S1061, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state". Note that this "normal gaming state" refers to the "normal gaming state (sub) other than" first high probability state "," second high probability state "," third high probability state "and" fourth high probability state ". Point). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”, the processing is shifted to S1062. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”, the processing is shifted to S1063.

  In S1062, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine an effect in the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state". Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1063, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “first high probability state”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1064. That is, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1064. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1065.

  In S1064, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine an effect during the first high probability state. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1065, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the "second high probability state". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1066. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "second high probability state", the process proceeds to S1067.

  In S1066, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine an effect during the second high probability state. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1067, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the "third high probability state". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "third high probability state", the process proceeds to S1068. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "third high probability state", the process proceeds to S1069.

  In S1068, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine an effect during the third high probability state. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1069, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine an effect during the fourth high probability state. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Normal game state (sub) during / time reduction effect determination process]
A subroutine (normal gaming state (sub) medium / time reduction effect determining process) executed in S1062 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this "normal gaming state" refers to the "normal gaming state (sub) other than" first high probability state "," second high probability state "," third high probability state "and" fourth high probability state ". Point).

  In S1071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, in the case where the variation pattern command is “83H00H” to “83H06H”, it is a loss. Among them, the variation pattern commands “83H02H” to “83H04H” are the lost reach. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the processing is shifted to S1072. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to S1084.

  In S1072, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1073.

  In S1073, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-mentioned point addition effect is executed as described above with reference to FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point addition effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S1074. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the point addition effect, the process proceeds to S1077.

  In S1074, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1075.

  In S1075, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the accumulated point is 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 checks and determines the points accumulated in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1076. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to step S1077.

  In S1076, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability flag, and clears the accumulated points. Therefore, when performing the next game, it has shifted to the "first high probability state". If this process ends, the process moves to S1077.

  In S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the navigation acquisition effect. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation acquisition effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S1078. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the navigation acquisition effect, the process proceeds to S1079. Here, as described above, when the lose super reach B of the navigation acquisition effect contents shown in FIG. 37 is selected, in the “first high probability state”, a lottery in which navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 is performed If it is determined that the lose super reach B is selected and it is determined that the navigation is to be given, the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect in S1077.

  In S1078, the sub CPU 201 adds one to the number of navigation times (numbers) stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203, and sets the navigation acquisition effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1079.

  In S1079, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the game number counter. The number-of-games counter is for counting the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the number of special symbol games). If this process ends, the process moves to S1080.

  In S1080, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special symbol games counted as a reference for executing the ceiling lottery is the number of games for performing the predetermined ceiling lottery as shown in FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, the process proceeds to S1081. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1081, the sub CPU 201 executes ceiling lottery processing. Specifically, the ceiling lottery is executed based on the ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1082.

  In S1082, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling lottery performed in S1081 is won. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has won the ceiling lottery, the process proceeds to S1083. Further, when it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 has won the ceiling lottery, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1083, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state flag, and clears the number of special symbol games counted as a criterion for performing the ceiling lottery. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1084, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the lottery result is "small hit". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H07H" to "83H14H", it is "small hit". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is "small hit", the process proceeds to S1085. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process moves to S1094.

  In S1085, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time is short ("time saving gaming state"). If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the "time-saving gaming state", the process proceeds to S1087. In addition, when it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the "time saving game state", the processing is shifted to S1086.

  In S1086, the sub CPU 201 sets a special effect. In this case, although the player is not in the "time-saving game state", the player wins the "small hit", so the above-described so-called revival effect may be performed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1087, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is 1 or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is one or more, the process proceeds to S1089. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is one or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1088.

  Here, the navigation suppression flag is a flag that is set when there is a possibility that the player has performed a so-called "capture attack". Specifically, as described above, the probability of entering the V winning hole 57 when entering the second big prize device 53 is about 2/3. Further, in the first embodiment, the nail arrangement is performed so that the winning rate to the second big winning device 53 is about 1⁄3 in the case of the normal right-handed strike, and the probability of “per V” is about It is 1 / 4.5. Therefore, it can be said that the expectation for "per V" is 99.9% while the "time-saving game" is performed 50 times. Some skilled players do not make the second big winning device 53 win the game ball, but also the person who performs the "shooting strike" to operate the firing handle 25 so that the second starting port 45 gets the game ball. There is. By this "shooting hit", it is possible to obtain a winning ball for winning on the ball passing detector 43 and to increase the number of game balls on hand. In order to suppress such a strategic strike, when the "time saving game" after the 50th is performed, the navigation suppression flag is set. When the navigation suppression flag is set, navigation may be suppressed such that navigation is not executed even if navigation is given, or the number of navigations is subtracted. Further, instead of performing navigation, an effect may be performed to urge the user to stop the "shooting strike".

  In S1088, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. As an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation, for example, a common effect different from the navigation may be stored in the program ROM 202. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

In S1089, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving game is 50 times. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the time saving game is 50 times, it shifts the process to S1090. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time saving game is 50 times, the processing is shifted to S1091. Here, the above determination is made in S1089 since the possibility that "time saving game" will elapse 50 times without the above-described "capture shot" being performed is extremely low.
In addition, even if you are not a skilled person, the special figure type is small hit (2)-3 or small hit (2)-4 in succession in a state where navigation is given, "50 per V or more" In this case, in order to avoid that "time saving game state" ends without doing "perv" in this case, if you do not "perv" more than 50 times, it is necessary to suppress navigation There is. At this time, it is determined whether or not the navigation is given, and the number of wins of small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2 in the meantime is confirmed, for example, the number of wins is 10 or less. In this case, it may be decided not to give a penalty at the judgment of a strike strike, judging that it is not “per hit” despite launching according to the navigation instead of a strike strike. Here, as the penalty, for example, all the stored number of times of navigation may be deleted. Note that this judgment criterion may be designed arbitrarily. Also, conversely, if the number of wins of small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2 is more than 10 times, it may be determined that a strike has been made and a penalty may be given. Good.

  In S1090, the sub CPU 201 sets the navigation suppression flag, and sets an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2, the process proceeds to step S1092. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2, the process proceeds to step S1093.

  In S1092, the sub CPU 201 sets a launch navigation effect. The launch navigation effect is an effect such as prompting the player to launch the game ball. The contents of this effect will be described later (see FIG. 81). In addition, when this launch navigation effect is performed, in the case of “per-V”, the number of navigation points being counted is subtracted. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1093, the sub CPU 201 sets a launch suppression navigation effect. The launch suppression navigation effect is an effect that causes the player to suppress the launch of the game ball. The contents of this effect will also be described later (see FIG. 82). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is the special view (2) -1. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is the special view (2) -1, the process proceeds to step S1095. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the special view (2) -1, the process proceeds to step S1096.

  In S1095, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect in accordance with whether or not the "time saving game state" is in effect. For example, what is required is to set a so-called revival effect if it is not the "time-saving gaming state". In addition, in the case of "time-saving gaming state", it is sufficient to set a special effect that is not a revival effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1096, it is determined whether or not the sub CPU 201 is in time saving ("time saving gaming state"). Specifically, when it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the "time saving game state", the processing is shifted to S1097. In addition, when it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the "time saving game state", the processing is shifted to S1098.

  In S1097, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect whose special view type corresponds to the special view (1) -1 to the special view (1) -12. In addition, as shown in FIG. 38, this effect corresponds to fluctuation pattern commands “83H29H” to “83H40H”. Since this effect relates to a big hit in the middle of the night, it may be an effect that indicates that it is irregular. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1098, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is the special view (1) -1. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H15H”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is the special view (1) -1, the process proceeds to step S1099. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -1, the process proceeds to step S1100.

  In S1099, the sub CPU 201 determines the decorative symbol to be "777", adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets premium reach effect. Although the number of times of navigation is increased by three in the first embodiment, for example, all navigation flags may be set. In the set game, it is possible to turn off the navigation flag until the "time saving game" reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the number of times of navigation does not increase more than necessary. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1100, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is the special view (1) -2. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H16H” to “83H18H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time with delivery ball". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to step S1101. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1102.

  In S1101, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative symbol by drawing in accordance with the change pattern command, and sets the effect. Referring to the big hit navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 42, the big hit navigation lottery is performed according to the character selected by the player. The timing of this navi lottery will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1102, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special drawing type is a special drawing (1) -3 to a special drawing (1) -7. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H19H” to “83H23H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no balls out". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1103. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1104.

  In S1103, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative symbol by drawing in accordance with the change pattern command, and sets the effect. For example, an effect to notify that the "time saving game state" is set at any timing is set. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is a special view (1) -8 to a special view (1) -11. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H24H” to “83H27H”. That is, it is determined whether or not the "no balls out normal" big hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -8 to the special drawing (1) -11, the processing is shifted to S1105. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -8 to the special view (1) -11, that is, if it determines that the special view type is the special view (1) -12, the process proceeds to S1106. Transfer.

  In S1105, the sub-CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative symbol by drawing in accordance with the change pattern command, and sets the effect. Furthermore, the first high probability state flag is set. For example, it is set so as to display the effect contents to notify of the transition from the “normal gaming state” to the “first high probability state”. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

In S1106, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a RAM clear flag. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the process proceeds to step S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the RAM clear flag is present, the process proceeds to step S1107. If it is determined that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 performs lottery with a probability of 1/2, transfers the process to S1109 only when won, and transfers the process to S1107 if not won. You may do it. This makes the transition to the "fourth high probability state" more difficult. When the processing of S1106 is performed, the RAM clear flag may be turned off.
Note that, as described above, when the power on flag is not the RAM clear flag but the power on flag is set as the condition for transition to the “fourth high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the power on flag is present in S1106. You should do it.

  In S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process (fourth high probability state transition lottery) for shifting to the above-mentioned "fourth high probability state". For example, the winning probability may be 1/10. If this process ends, the process moves to S1108.

  In S1108, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high probability state" is won. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has won, the process proceeds to S1109. If it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 has won, the process proceeds to S1110.

  In S1109, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state flag, and sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high probability state" is won. For example, an image may be displayed to which an "all day navigation ticket" is given. Note that the fourth high probability state transition lottery may not be performed. That is, it may be possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state” only when the special figure (1) -12 is won with the RAM clear flag set. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1110, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high probability state" has not been won. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Determination process during the first high probability state]
A subroutine (first high probability state effect generation determination process) executed in S1064 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1121, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the sub CPU 201 has lost the lottery result. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the processing is shifted to S1122. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to S1126.

  In S1122, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. Unlike the “normal gaming state” and the “second high probability state” in the “first high probability state”, there is no point addition. If this process ends, the process moves to S1123.

  In S1123, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the first high probability gaming number. Note that the first high probability game number, which is the number of games in the "first high probability state", is stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1124.

  In S1124, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first high probability game count is 20. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability game count is 20, the process proceeds to S1125. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first high probability in-game count is 20, the present subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, the game is set to shift to the “second high probability state” when the game in the “first high probability state” is 20 times, but it is not limited to this. When the game in the “first high probability state” is twenty times, the “first high probability state” may perform a fall lottery in which it falls to the “normal game state”.

  In S1125, the sub CPU 201 sets a first high probability state end effect, and sets a second high probability state flag. By this, after the "first high probability state" is finished, it becomes the "second high probability state". When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1126, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time with delivery ball". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to step S1127. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to step S1128. Here, the special figure (2) does not change. In addition, when it is determined that it is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, it becomes "big hit gaming state", then it shifts to "time saving game state", but time saving in "time saving game state" If the game has been performed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the game transitions to the "normal game state".

  In S1127, the sub CPU 201 determines the decorative symbol to be "777" corresponding to the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and 3 times in the set game Also set the effect as all navigation where navigation effect is performed on all. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1128, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is a special view (1) -3 to a special view (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no delivery time and time short". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1129. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the process proceeds to step S1130.

  In S1129, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect as all navigation described above. At this time, since it is a jackpot without popping out, an effect is performed that does not indicate that it is a jackpot. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1130, the sub-CPU 201 sets the first high probability state continuation effect, and clears the first high probability middle game count. That is, in the case where the special figure type is the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12, that is, when it is a big hit of "no balls out normal", the "first high probability state" is again realized. In addition, as the effect in this case, content is displayed that suggests that the “first high probability state” is to be continued. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Determination process during second high probability state decision processing]
A subroutine (second high probability state effect generation determination process) executed in S1066 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1141, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the sub CPU 201 has lost the lottery result. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1142. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the processing is shifted to S1149.

  In S1142, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1143.

  In S1143, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to add points. In this point addition, points corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern are added with reference to the point addition table shown in FIG. 40 (a). In addition, in the “second high probability state”, when the lottery result in S1141 is a loss, points are always added. If this process ends, the process moves to S1144.

  In S1144, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to step S1145. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to step S1146.

  In S1145, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state flag and turns off the second high probability state flag. In addition, clear points. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. Here, in the first embodiment, the points are cleared, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, "-100" may be added without clearing the points, and the points of "0" or more may be left. It is possible.

  In S1146, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of games during the second high probability. Note that the number of games in the second high probability, which is the number of games in the “second high probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1147.

  In S1147, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second high probability game count is ten. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the second high probability game count is 10, the processing is shifted to S1148. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the second high probability in-game count is 10, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1148, the sub CPU 201 sets the second high probability state end effect, and turns off the second high probability state flag. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. As a result, after the “second high probability state” ends, the state shifts to the “first high probability state”.

  In S1149, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is a special view (1) -1 to a special view (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a time-saving big hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is a special drawing (1) -1 to a special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1150. This subroutine ends. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -1 to the special drawing (1) -7, that is, the special drawing (1) -8 to the special drawing (1) -12. The process shifts to step S1151. In the case of the special view (1) -12, the process may be shifted to S1107.

  In S1150, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1151, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state rush effect and sets the first high probability state flag. Specifically, the effect may be such that it can be recognized that transition to the first high probability state is made. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Third high probability state effect determination processing]
The subroutine (third high probability state effect generation determination process) executed in S1068 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1161, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1162. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to step S1163.

  In S1162, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1163, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time with delivery ball". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1164. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to step S1166. The special figure (2) does not change.

  In S1164, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is "777", adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1165.

  In S1165, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. As described above, when it is a big hit with "time saving", all the times in the set game are in the all navigation state where navigation is performed in the game. On the other hand, the ceiling condition will end.

  In S1166, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is a special view (1) -3 to a special view (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no balls out". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1167. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -8 to the special drawing (1). It is determined that it is -12, and the process moves to S1169.

  In S1167, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1168.

  In S1168, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. Here too, when there is a big hit with "time saving", while all navigation states in which navigation is performed in all time saving games in the set game are taken, while the ceiling state is ended. The ceiling state may be ended only when the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2.

  In S1169, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state continuation effect. Here, it is a state determined to be a big hit without "time saving", and the ceiling state does not end. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Determination process during the fourth high probability state]
A subroutine (fourth high probability state effect determination process) executed in S1069 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1171, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the processing is shifted to S1172. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process moves to S1173.

  In S1172, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine the stop symbol and the contents of the effect based on the change pattern command. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. Note that the "fourth high probability state" is cleared by performing initialization processing such as RAM clear or power off. Other than that, it will not be cleared.

  In S1173, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time with delivery ball". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -1 or the special drawing (1) -2, the processing is shifted to S1174. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -1 or the special view (1) -2, the process proceeds to step S1175. Here, the special figure (2) does not change.

  In S1174, the sub CPU 201 determines the decorative symbol to be "777", adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. That is, a big hit with "time saving" results in so-called all navigation, and this state does not end. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1175, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special view type is a special view (1) -3 to a special view (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "no balls out". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the processing is shifted to S1176. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -3 to the special drawing (1) -7, the process proceeds to step S1177.

  In S1176, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect. Here too, the entire navigation state does not end. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1177, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state continuation effect. As described above, in the case of a big hit without "time saving", the "fourth high probability state" is not ended. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Process when receiving a big hit start command]
A subroutine (big hit start command reception process) executed in S1047 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1181, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game state is a hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, it is determined whether it is a big hit of all navigation. Here, the “normal gaming state” refers to “other than the first high probability state”, the “second high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state” as described above. "Normal gaming state (sub)" refers to. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is a hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1182. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game state is a hit in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1190 as a hit of all navigations.

  In S1182, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit that is given after a short time. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the time saving is applied, the process proceeds to S1183. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time reduction is to be applied, the process proceeds to step S1189.

  In S1183, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for acquiring a random number value for the navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1184.

  In S1184, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit of “with out ball”. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2 is a big hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hit is a hit of “with ball”, the process proceeds to S1185. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the hit is a hit of “with balls”, the process proceeds to S1186.

  In S1185, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the character selected by the player using the effect button 23. If the character is not selected, an effect corresponding to the initially set character is set. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1186, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of executing a navigation lottery for acquiring a random number value using the no pop-out time short navigation lottery table as shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1187.

  In S1187, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for adding the number of times of navigation based on the result of the navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1188.

  In S1188, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the number of remaining navigations. For example, it may be an effect such as drawing a fortune in which the remaining number of times of navigation is written. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1189, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that it is a hit with no time saving. For example, it may be a notification effect such as drawing a fortune in which content suggesting transition to the “first high probability state” is drawn. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1190, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in time saving. Here, a big hit in time is a 5 round big hit according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), or there is a "per v" from a small hit according to the special figure (2). Since the per-V start command to be described later is transmitted, the big hit start command is not transmitted. Note that even in the case of V, a big hit start command may be transmitted instead of the V start command. In that case, it is desirable to be able to identify the history of the jackpot in the sub-substrate by including data indicating how the jackpot occurred in the jackpot start command. Therefore, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a 5-round jackpot according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), the process proceeds to S1191. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the “normal game state” and is a big hit in time saving, the process proceeds to S1192.

  In S1191, the sub CPU 201 sets a time-speaking medium-sized big hit effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1192, the sub CPU 201 sets a jackpot effect indicating that all navigation has been confirmed. Here, as described above, “all navigation” refers to executing navigation in all “time-saving game states” in the set game. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Process when receiving start command per V]
A subroutine (processing for receiving a start command per V) executed in S1051 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1201, the sub CPU 201 sets a per-V presentation effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect to be performed when the game ball wins in the V winning hole 57 and becomes “V hit”. For example, an image of a fanfare may be displayed.

  In S1202, the sub CPU 201 determines whether navigation has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation has been executed, the process moves to S1203. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In S1203, the sub CPU 201 subtracts one from the number of times of navigation. If this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

  In S1204, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is V winning, triggered by small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is V prize winning triggered by the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, that is, if it is determined that "per V", the processing in S1205 Transfer. In addition, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is V prize winning triggered by the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, that is, when it is not determined to be "per V", S1206. Transfer the process to

  In S1205, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning success effect. The success effect is, specifically, an effect to be performed when the player has won a "big hit" of 16R by performing a shooting operation according to the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 81 described later may be performed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1206, the sub CPU 201 sets an avoidance failure effect. The avoidance failure effect is, specifically, an effect that is performed when the player wins a “big hit” of 2R by performing a launch operation not along the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 82 described later may be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S1207.

  In S1207, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is V prize winning triggered by the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is V prize winning triggered by small hit (2) -3 or small hit (2) -4, that is, if it is determined that "per V", processing is performed in S1208. Transfer. Also, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is V prize winning triggered by the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4, that is, when it is not determined that “per V”, Exit the subroutine

  In S1208, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number per 2R. In addition, the number of times per 2R is the number of times of winning the "big hit game" of two rounds. If this process ends, the process moves to S1209.

  In S1209, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of times per 2R is 3 among the three hits excluding the so-called first hit in the set game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times per 2R is 3, the process proceeds to S1210. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of times per 2R is three, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1210, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times of navigation to clear the number of times per 2R. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, it is possible to set a winning failure effect in S1205 and to set an avoidance success effect in S1206. Of course, it is also possible to set these renditions additionally.

[Process when small hit end command is received]
A subroutine (small hit end command reception process) executed in S1053 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1221, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1222. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1223.

  In S1222, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning failure effect. The prize failure effect is an effect to be executed when the “n perv” is not performed although the launch navigation effect is executed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1223, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S 1224. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1225.

  In S1224, the sub CPU 201 sets an avoidance success effect. The avoidance success effect is an effect that is executed when the "V hit" is not performed when the launch suppression navigation effect is executed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1225, sub CPU201 performs processing which reports the result when it is tentatively winning in V winning a prize mouth 57. For example, in the case where the player has won the V winning hole 57, if the player has won a "round hit game" in two rounds, a notification may be issued to indicate that the player has made a good hit. Also, for example, if the player had won the V jack 57 if he had won 16 rounds of "big hit games", a notification indicating that he was disappointed for the player would be performed. Just do it. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. It is also possible to set a winning success effect at S1222 and to set an avoidance failure effect at S1224, and it is also possible to set these effects additionally.

  Therefore, when the launch navigation effect or launch suppression effect set as the advantage information for the player is displayed, depending on whether or not the "V hit" is displayed, as a result, "winning success rendering", "winning failure" Among the effects, "avoidance success effect" and "avoidance failure effect", the corresponding effects are displayed.

[Process when receiving a special winning opening open display command]
A subroutine (processing for receiving a special winning opening open display command) executed in S1055 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special view type is the special view (1) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special drawing type is the special drawing (1) -2, the processing is shifted to S1232. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special view type is the special view (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1239.

  In S1232, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the "normal game state" or the "second high probability state". Here, the “normal gaming state” is the “normal gaming state (sub) other than the“ first high probability state ”, the“ second high probability state ”, the“ third high probability state ”and the“ fourth high probability state ”. Point). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot is in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1233. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the jackpot is in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to step S 1239.

  In S1233, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first round of "big hit game" is being executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first round of the "big hit game" is being executed, the processing is shifted to S1234. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first round of the "big hit game" is being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1236.

  In S1234, the sub CPU 201 performs a jackpot navi lottery based on the selected character, navi lottery random number, using the jackpot navi lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1235.

  In S1235, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. Here, for example, when the navigation is to be added in the navigation lottery, an effect such as winning of the selected character in the competition game or the like is set. Such an effect need not necessarily be performed in the first round, but may be set to be performed in any round.

  In S1236, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is a round for notifying of a lottery result. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the round is for notifying of the lottery result, the process proceeds to S1237. In the first embodiment, the rounds for reporting the lottery result are five rounds, but the rounds are not limited to five rounds, and may be another round. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the round is for notifying of the lottery result, the process proceeds to S1238.

  In S1237, the sub CPU 201 sets a lottery result notification effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect in accordance with the set effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1239, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect in accordance with the effect set as in S1238. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Process for receiving an interval end command per special symbol]
A subroutine (processing for receiving a special symbol interval end command) executed in S1059 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1241, it is determined whether or not the sub CPU 201 is a "big hit" won in a short time. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the "big hit" won during the short time, the process proceeds to S1242. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the "big hit" has been won during the short time, the process proceeds to step S1249.

  In S1242, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the last "time-saving gaming state" in the set game. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is the last "time-saving gaming state" in the set game, the processing is shifted to S1243. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the last "time-saving game state" in the set game, the process proceeds to S1246.

  In S1243, the sub CPU 201 performs navigation lottery according to the number of "big hit" by the special symbol game in the set game, using the at the end of the set game navi lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1244.

In S1244, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. If this process ends, the process moves to S1245.
In S1245, the sub CPU 201 sets the gaming state to shift after the end of the set game. Specifically, if the gaming state before shifting to the set game is "first high probability state" to "third high probability state" and "normal gaming state (sub)", "first high probability" State is set. Also, if the gaming state before shifting to the set game is the "fourth high probability state", the "fourth high probability state" is set.
In addition, after the state of not winning the "big hit" of Tokusetsu (1) -1-Tokusou (1) -7 even after shifting to "the third high probability state" which is the ceiling state, a predetermined number of games continue In each case, the ceiling lottery is performed, and if the ceiling lottery is won, the “third high probability state” is accumulated in the configuration in which the “third high probability state” can be accumulated and stored. After completion of the set game, the game is shifted to the "third high probability state" again (the "third high probability state" is set).

  In S1246, the sub CPU 201 confirms the number of times of navigation stored in the work RAM 203 and determines whether or not there is a remaining number. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a remaining number, the process proceeds to S1247. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that there is a remaining number, the process proceeds to step S1248.

  In S1247, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1248, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation absence effect. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1249, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect according to the transition destination of the gaming state and the presence or absence of the navigation according to the determination that the jackpot is not the jackpot won during the "time saving gaming state". When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Display example]
An example of the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an effect per 16 R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1221 in FIG. 78). Further, FIG. 82 is a view showing effects in 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1223 in FIG. 78).

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs navigation when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the set game. As mentioned above, when “navi” is won in “small hit” in “time saving game state”, “big hit” in the case of “v hit” in the open state of the second big winning device 53 by this small hit It means a notice that suggests the number of rounds of "game".

  In the "time saving game state", after the game ball is won in the second starting opening 45 and the "small hit" is determined, the navigation is executed during the fluctuation time. That is, the navigation is performed several seconds before the fluctuating stop. The navigation may be displayed as an image in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. First, referring to FIG. 81, an example of navigation in the case where it is determined that 16 rounds of "big hit games" will be played when it becomes "per hit", when "small hit" is won. Will be explained. The special drawing type at this time is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2.

  When the "small hit" is won, the firing navigation effect is executed before the blade members 53a of the second big winning device 53 operate. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), an image is displayed in the display area 13a. Specifically, a rifle sight and an image in which a bird is seen through the sight and the rifle is aimed at the bird are displayed. Then, the characters "That's hit!" Are also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that the “big hit game” of 16 rounds will be performed when the “V hit” is reached.

  The player recognizes this image and continues the firing without stopping the firing of the gaming ball. At this time, when the game ball is won in the V winning hole 57, a successful effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), an image is displayed as if a rifle bullet hit a bird. And the characters "hit!" Are also displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that 16 rounds of "big hit games" are to be started.

  In addition, even if the launch navigation effect is executed and the player continues to launch the game ball, if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 57 in the "small hit game", the failure effect is To be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), an image is displayed in which the bird comes off the sight and runs away. Then, the letters "miss" are also displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, in the case where it is determined that the “big hit game” of two rounds will be played when it becomes “per hit”, when it is determined when “small hit” is won. An example will be described. The special drawing type at this time is small hit (2) -3 or small hit (2) -4.

  When the "small hit" is won, the launch suppression navigation effect is executed before the blade members 53a of the second big winning device 53 operate. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an image is displayed in the display area 13a. Specifically, a rifle sight, and an image that shows a bomb seen through the sight and the aim of the rifle is displayed on the bomb. Then, the characters "Don't strike!" Are also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that the “big hit game” of two rounds is performed when the “V per hit” is obtained.

  The player recognizes this image and stops the firing of the game ball. However, if the game ball can not be stopped properly, there is a possibility that the game ball will be won in the V winning hole 57. If the game ball has won the V winning hole 57, an avoidance failure effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), an image of an explosion is displayed when a rifle bullet hits a bomb. Then, the letters "Failure!" Are also displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the "round hit game" of two rounds is started.

  In addition, when the game ball is prevented from winning in the V winning hole 57 by the launch suppression navigation effect being executed and the player stopping the launch of the game ball, the escape success effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), an image in which the bomb is dislocated from the sight and disappears is displayed. Then, the characters "avoidance of danger" are also displayed.

  In addition, during the set game, by entering the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, a "big hit" of five rounds may be won. Even in such a case, the effect by the image may be performed in the display area 13a. In such a case, although not shown, for example, in the display area 13a, a rifle sight and a bird are seen through the sight and an image of the bird hitting a tree and falling It should be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that five rounds of "big hit games" are performed instead of "per V".

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which the player becomes advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game, and the number of rounds is increased by satisfying a predetermined condition. It is possible to perform a notification (navigation) to suggest. Thus, the player can play the game in an advantageous situation by recognizing the notification.
If no navigation is given, it is preferable that, for example, “?” Is displayed over the sighting device so that it does not know which round of “big hit game” will be made by “per V”. In addition, if "per hit" is displayed when "?" Is displayed over the sighting device, a bird is displayed when the "big hit game" of 16 rounds is to be started, 2 rounds When the "big hit game" of is to be started, the player may leave the result by displaying an explosion.

[Various notification processing by the payout control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Power on process
First, with reference to FIG. 83, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a procedure of power on processing in the first embodiment. The power on process is a process started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets the stack pointer, the interrupt mode, and the interrupt vector.

  First, the payout CPU 301 performs an entry / output port setting process (S301). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power failure is detected (S302). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the power failure detection signal is at the H level (high level).

  In S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is at the H level (when the determination in S302 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure is detected, and performs the processing of S302.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S302 that the power failure detection signal is not at the H level (S302 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection state is not and the write permission process of the RAM 303 is performed. Perform (S303).

  In this processing, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processing such as initialization processing of a work area of the RAM 303, in addition to the writing permission processing of the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on (S304).

  In S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is on (when the determination in S304 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the processing of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S304 that the backup clear switch 121 is not on (S304 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines whether there is a power failure detection flag (S305). In this process, the payout CPU 301 confirms the power failure detection flag.

  In S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection flag is not present (when the determination in S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the processing of S310 described later. On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a power failure detection flag in S305 (when the determination in S305 is YES), the payout CPU 301 calculates a work damage check value (S306). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs damage check of the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates a work damage check value.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes error detection processing such as parity check or cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and sets the checksum obtained as the execution result as the operation damage check value.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the work damage check value is normal (S307). In S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (when the determination in S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the processing of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S307 that the work damage check value is normal (when the determination in S307 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs initial processing at the time of power recovery (S308).

  That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the power failure detection flag is present, and the operation damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 is in a state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be restored, and initialization processing at power recovery is performed based on the data stored in the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs security ball monitoring initial setting processing (S309). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs initial setting for determining whether or not 15 gaming balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B. In the first embodiment, the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B are 1950 times corresponding to the falling time 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15) of 15 gaming balls as the falling time 130 ms of one gaming ball. The initial value of.

  Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B. In the first embodiment, the first and second security ball timers 306A, 2000 ms are assumed to be the time when it is assumed that the security of 15 gaming balls is completed based on the falling time 1950 ms (1950 times) of 15 gaming balls. This is the initial value of 306B.

  After the processing of S309, the payout CPU 301 restores the value of the program counter to the address before the power failure. Specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power on process and continues the process of the program that was being executed when the power on process was performed.

  If S304 is YES, S305 is NO, or S307 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not be restored to the state before the power is turned off, and the power Execute processing when the is input.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 (S310), and performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S311). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the cause for stopping the overpayment and the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the overdelivery specified number (10) to be described later is also initialized.

  In addition, in the state where the stop factor due to the ball breakage occurs, the display by the payout state notification display device 178 described later is turned off for 2 seconds so as not to be influenced by the accumulated state of the collateral balls in the ball supply passage 171.

  Specifically, when the predetermined initialization operation is performed when the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-described stop factor, the payout state informing display device 178 performs the process 2 until the determination of the ball breakage ends. During the second, the result of the determination is not displayed.

  As a result, for example, it is possible to determine that the ball has run out after a predetermined initialization operation, and not to perform notification by the payout state notification display device 178 when it is determined that the ball is normal. Thus, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. Here, the predetermined initialization operation is, for example, that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. If the power is not turned on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion A work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the security ball monitor initial setting process described above (S312), and executes the main process (S313).

  When the power is turned off, the use register, the interrupt state, and the stack pointer are saved and the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0 and the current is switched to the low current.

  In addition, since it is also possible to assume that it is not the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4) when the power is turned off during the payout operation, the game ball can freely fall at the time of power cut by forcibly setting the excitation data to 0. To prevent. Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption.

  When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption, the power-off process may be on standby or interrupted for only the time necessary for the game ball to fall, and the execution period may be extended.

  Also, instead of forcibly dropping the game ball, the game ball may be controlled to fall freely. In this case, the power-off process may be put on standby or interrupted, and the execution period may be extended, in order to provide a sufficient time for detecting the free-falling game ball.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main processing performed in S313 in the power on processing (see FIG. 83) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the main process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S321). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S321 that the system timer is not 4 or less (if S321 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S321.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less in S321 (if S321 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts "4" from the system timer (S322). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes a system timer.

  That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes the processing from S323 to be described later every 4 ms by executing S321 and S322.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers used in the main processing (S323). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes ball lending control processing (S324). In this process, the payout CPU 301 receives game ball management and generation of a command to be sent to the card unit 150 when the lending operation unit 151 is operated, and a ball lending command sent from the card unit 150. When you do, you manage the number of game balls which it lends out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a winning ball control process (S325). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays out when the game ball has won in the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the general winning openings 51, 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. Manage the game balls to be put out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout status notification display device 178 so that the payout control circuit 300 displays that the error has occurred on condition that the payout control circuit 300 has an error (S326).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the system timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even while the main processing shown in FIG. 84 described above is being executed.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 performs system timer interrupt processing in response to a clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. Run.

  First, the payout CPU 301 receives detection commands (signals) of the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes command reception processing for analyzing the received commands simultaneously (S331).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers (for example, the first and second security ball timers 306A, 306B, etc.) used in the system timer interrupt process (S332). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a security ball presence detection process (see FIG. 86) described later (S333).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a security ball absence detection process (see FIG. 87) described later (S334). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes count switch detection processing (see FIG. 88) described later (S335). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor activation waiting process (see FIG. 89) described later (S336).

  Finally, the payout CPU 301 executes command transmission processing for transmitting a command indicating payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S337). For example, when the payout CPU 301 receives a signal indicating that the lower tray is full from the lower tray full switch 179, the main control circuit outputs a payout error information command indicating that the lower tray is full. Send to 70

  However, since the main control circuit 70 holds the start-up waiting time of the sub control circuit 200 for a specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, dispensing error information is received until the main control circuit 70 can receive data. Do not send commands.

  Here, when the power is turned on, the history information on the dispensing error information is cleared. In addition, even if the lower bowl full tank state is canceled by discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 22 during the power down, for example, before the power down, the lower tray after the power failure return There is no transmission of information to the effect that the full tank condition has been released. However, with regard to the dispensing motor abnormality and the over-dispensing abnormality, which are canceled when the power is turned on again, they are initialized at the time of power failure recovery.

[Collateral ball detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the security ball presence detection process performed in S333 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a process of the security ball presence detection process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first security ball counter 305A is 0 (S341). In S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first security ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S341 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the gaming ball to the first ball supply passage 171A is It is determined that the supply is not necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S341 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S341 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the gaming ball to the first ball supply passage 171A is It is determined that the first 15 ball security switch 172A is in the ON state (S342).

  In S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the ON state (when the determination in S342 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the first ball supply passage 171A to a predetermined number (embodiment In 1, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is no collateral ball, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state in S342 (when the determination in S342 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines the predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are stored, that is, there are security balls, and the value of the first security ball counter 305A is decremented by "1" (S343).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first security ball counter 305A is 0 (S344). In S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first security ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S344 is NO), the payout CPU 301 replenishes the gaming ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S344 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S344 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to 1 (S345).

  Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when the game ball need not be supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the first ball supply passage is determined. This flag is set to "0" when the game ball needs to be supplied to 171A, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the first stop factor flag to 0 (S346). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the gaming ball by the winning ball case unit 170. There is a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor, and to “0” when there is no stop factor, particularly with regard to the payout of gaming balls accumulated (secured) in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is.

  In the process of S346, the supply of gaming balls to the first ball supply passage 171A is completed, and it is determined in S344 that a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of gaming balls are stored. Then, the first stop factor flag is set to 0 in order to release the ball breakage which is the stop factor. In addition, although it mentions later as a stop factor, there exist various stop factors other than a ball breakage. Here, a broken ball is given as an example.

Next, if S341 is a YES determination, S342 is a NO determination, or S344 is a NO determination, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 or not (S347). ).

  In S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination is YES in S347), the payout CPU 301 controls the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply is not necessary, and the security ball presence detection process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S347 that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (if the determination in S347 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the gaming ball to the second ball supply passage 171B is It is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is ON (S348).

  In S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the ON state (when the determination in S348 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the second ball supply passage 171B to a predetermined number (embodiment In 1, it is judged that 15 game balls are not stored, that is, it is judged that there is no security ball, and the security ball presence detection process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state in S348 (if YES in S348), the payout CPU 301 determines the predetermined number of second ball supply passages 171B. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are stored, that is, there is a security ball, and the value of the second security ball counter 305B is decremented by "1" (S349).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 (S350). In S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second security ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S350 is NO), the payout CPU 301 supplies the gaming ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the security ball presence detection process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S350 that the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S350 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and 1 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S351).

  Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply gaming balls to the second ball supply passage 171 B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the second ball supply passage This flag is set to “0” when the game ball needs to be supplied to 171 B, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the second stop cause flag to 0 (S352), and ends the processing for detecting the security ball presence. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the gaming ball by the winning ball case unit 170. There is a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor, and to “0” when there is no stop factor, particularly with regard to the payout of gaming balls accumulated (secured) in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is.

  In the process of S352, the supply of gaming balls to the second ball supply passage 171B is completed, and it is determined in S350 that a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of gaming balls are stored. Then, the second stop cause flag is set to 0 in order to release the ball breakage which is the stop cause.

  In this way, in the security ball presence detection process, the security ball counter and the 15 ball security switch, the presence or absence of the security ball, the judgment of replenishment of the gaming ball, and the stop factor (for the payout motor or sprocket or payout) Since it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel, it is possible to more accurately manage the collateral balls in the payout.

[No collateral ball detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the security ball absence detection process performed in S334 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of a process of the security ball absence detection process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first security ball timer 306A is 0 (S361). In S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first security ball timer 306A is not 0 (when the determination of S361 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is supplying the gaming ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. The process moves to S371.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S361 that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (when the determination of S361 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is judged that the supply of the balls is completed, and it is judged whether or not the value of the first security ball counter 305A is 0 (S362).

  In S362, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first security ball counter 305A is 0 (if S362 is a YES determination), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number of the first ball supply passages 171A. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are stored, that is, it is determined that there is a security ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15 ball security switch 172A is in the OFF state (S363).

  Here, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” every time the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In step S343 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 86), “1” is subtracted, ie, the value of the updated first collateral ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the gaming ball by the first sprocket 173A It is determined whether or not the payout is prohibited.

  For example, if S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a YES determination, both the value of the first security ball timer 306A and the value of the first security ball counter 305A are 0 as predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first security ball timer 306A set as a time sufficient to pay out 15 gaming balls from the ball tank 161, has elapsed, the first security ball counter It means that 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of 305A, has elapsed.

  The initial value of the first security ball counter 305A, 1950 times (1950 ms), is a value that is not subtracted if the first 15-ball security switch 172A does not detect the game ball, so when 2000 ms has elapsed (0 When 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first security ball counter 305A, becomes 0), the first ball supply passage 171A is refilled with 15 gaming balls. Is guaranteed.

  On the other hand, when S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a NO determination, when the value of the first security ball timer 306A becomes 0, the value of the first security ball counter 305A becomes 0. It will not be.

  That is, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first security ball timer 306A, has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first security ball counter 305A, have not elapsed. Thereby, it can be estimated that there was a time in which the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A did not detect the gaming ball, that is, there was a time in which the replenishment of the gaming ball was interrupted, until 2000 ms passed. Therefore, if S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a NO determination, it is determined that the first ball supply passage 171A is not replenished with 15 gaming balls.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs processing of comparing the value of the first security ball timer 306A with the value of the first security ball counter 305A constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the OFF state (when S363 is NO), the payout CPU 301 selects 15 in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the gaming ball is being replenished, and the process proceeds to S371.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state in S363 (when the determination in S363 is YES), the payout CPU 301 once performs the above-described S361 and S362. Even though 15 game balls are guaranteed to be supplied to 1 ball supply passage 171A, 15 game balls are not supplied to first ball supply passage 171A due to any factor, that is, It is determined that there is no security ball, and the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to 0 (S364).

  Here, as a factor to be judged as YES in S363, there may be mentioned, for example, the case where the game balls are excessively paid out due to a defect of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174 or the like. Also, at this time, the payout of the gaming balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

  Here, when the gaming balls are paid out excessively, for example, as a result of the first sprocket 173A rotating excessively, from 15 to 14 gaming balls being supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A The first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects that the gaming balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A move in the direction of the first sprocket 173A in a row following the dropped gaming balls that have been paid out. Since the game ball also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state.

  That is, even if the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0, the payout CPU 301 causes the game balls to be dispensed by the first sprocket 173A. When the gaming ball is not detected by the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A before, the payout of the gaming ball by the first sprocket 173A through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  As described above, since the payout CPU 301 can grasp whether or not there is a gaming ball supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, payout management can be performed more accurately.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the first security ball timer 306A as monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 (S365). When the 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the notification by the payout state notification display device 178 is performed.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first security ball counter 305A (S366), and shifts the processing to S371.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S362 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (if the determination in S362 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines the predetermined number of first ball supply passages 171A ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are not stored, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the first stop factor flag (S367).

  In this process, as described above, it is determined in S361 and S362 that the first ball supply passage 171A is not replenished with the 15 game balls, so that the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited , 1 is set to the first stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the first security ball counter 305A is not 0 when the value of the first security ball timer 306A is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibit payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S368), and moves the process to S371. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

  Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotational position (drive position) at which the gaming ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the first embodiment, the number of steps of the dispensing motor 174 is controlled based on the origin.

  In addition, when the first sprocket 173A is stopped based on some stop factor (such as "error related to payout" described later), the index for causing the first sprocket 173A to grasp the position detection sensor (for example, the rotational position of the first sprocket 173A) Because the current rotational position (drive position) is unknown because the) is not provided, ie, it is unclear how many steps the payout motor 174 has been driven with respect to the origin, so that the first sprocket 173A The origin may also be unknown.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A stops based on the stop cause, that is, when the home position adjustment flag is set to 1, home position adjustment control for grasping the home position of the first sprocket 173A. Is done. That is, when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited as described above, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control. The same applies to retry control described later.

  As described above, since the origin position control of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted by performing the origin adjustment control, for example, the dispensing device using the sprocket 173 not provided with the position detection sensor accurately dispenses, for example. It is possible to do

  In the first embodiment, the dispensing device in which the position detection sensor is not provided on the sprocket 173 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the sprocket is provided with the position detection sensor By performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to more accurately manage the position of the sprocket and the payout, so it is possible to more accurately dispense.

  The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set according to the presence or absence of request for origin adjustment control, and is set to “1” when there is a request for origin adjustment control, and when there is no request for origin adjustment control. It is a flag set to "0".

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 181A. Here, the above-mentioned unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) is smaller than a payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later.

  Furthermore, a unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) is a drive amount obtained by dividing a payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later by four times (origin request retry frequency described later) as a specific number. It is.

  Further, the origin adjustment control is control common to retry control described later. Therefore, also in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the drive of the payout motor 174 constitutes a control unit and a drive control unit.

  Here, in the above-described S367, although the first stop factor flag is set to 1 to prohibit the payout of the gaming ball by the first sprocket 173A, in the case where the origin adjustment control is required as described above The origin adjustment can not be performed if the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is not permitted.

  The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the first embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the gaming ball is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the gaming ball on the condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent that the home point adjustment control (retry control) can not be performed due to the payout of the gaming ball being prohibited.

  Next, if S361 is NO, if S363 is NO, or after S366 or after S368, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the second security ball timer 306B is 0 or not. It discriminates (S371).

  In S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second security ball timer 306B is not 0 (when the determination in S371 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is supplying the gaming ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the security ball is not detected, and the security ball no detection process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S371 that the value of the second security ball timer 306B is 0 (when the determination of S371 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of the balls is completed, and it is determined whether the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 (S372).

  In S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination of S372 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number of the second ball supply passages 171B. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are stored, that is, it is determined that there is a security ball, and it is determined whether the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the OFF state (S373).

  Here, the determination as to whether or not the payout of gaming balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited is the same as the determination as to whether or not the payout of gaming balls by the first sprocket 173A described above is prohibited, I omit explanation. The payout CPU 301 that performs processing of comparing the value of the second security ball timer 306B with the value of the second security ball counter 305B constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S 373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172 B is not in the OFF state (when S 373 is NO), the payout CPU 301 selects 15 in the second ball supply passage 171 B. It is determined that the gaming ball is being replenished, and the security ball non-existence detection processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state in S373 (when the determination in S373 is YES), the payout CPU 301 once performs the above-described S371 and S372. Even though it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the 2 ball supply passage 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B for some reason, that is, It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to 0 (S374).

  Here, as a factor to be judged as YES in S373, there may be mentioned, for example, the case where the game balls are excessively paid out due to a defect of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174 or the like. Further, at this time, the payout of the gaming balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

  In other words, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B even if the value of the second security ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second security ball timer 306B is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B before the game is performed, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the second security ball timer 306B as monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 (S375). When the 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the notification by the payout state notification display device 178 is performed.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the monitoring count of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second security ball counter 305B (S376), and ends the security ball absence detection processing.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S372 that the value of the second security ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination of S372 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines the predetermined number of second ball supply passages 171B ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 game balls are not stored, that is, it is determined that there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the second stop factor flag (S377).

  In this process, as described above, it is determined that 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B in S371 and S372, and therefore, the payout of the game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited. , 1 is set to the second stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the second security ball counter 305B is not 0 when the value of the second security ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174. Prohibit payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S378), and ends the security ball absence detection process. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, since the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, the description will be omitted.

[Counting switch detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the count switch detection process performed in S335 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the counting switch detection process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has detected passage of a game ball (S381). In S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B does not detect passage of the gaming ball (when S381 is NO), the payout CPU 301 selects the count switch. End the detection process.

  Here, when the home point adjustment control is in progress, the gaming ball is not detected yet by the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B, so the determination in S381 is NO.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S381 that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the gaming ball (if the determination in S381 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the first determination. It is determined that the gaming balls have been paid out by the second sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B, and the payout request number is decremented by "1" (S382).

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 constitutes counting means.

  Here, the payout request number is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 based on the winning of the gaming machine to the various starting opening and the various winning openings and the lending of the gaming balls, and the winning sphere control command or lending received by the payout control circuit 300. It is a value obtained by successively adding the number of winning balls or the number of lending balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of gaming balls to be paid out by the winning ball case unit 170 (the total number of payouts).

  The requested payout number is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of winning balls and the number of lending balls described above correspond to the amount of payout. Further, the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes a payout storage unit. Further, the payout request number is subtracted by the payout of the game ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the drop request number (S383). Here, the requested number of drops is determined as the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the number of requested payouts (total amount of payouts) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The maximum is 15 pieces.

  For example, if the requested number of payouts (total amount of dispensed amounts) is 15 or more, the requested number of drops is 15 and if the requested number of dispenseds (total amount of dispenseds) is 14 or less, the requested number of drops is: It becomes the same number as the stored payout request number.

  Further, the drop request number is determined by the payout CPU 301 in accordance with the payout request number (the total of the payout amount). The requested drop number corresponds to the amount of withdrawal. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to the cut-off amount determination means.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S384). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S384 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if NO in S384), the payout CPU 301 shifts the processing to S387.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S384 (if S384 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S385).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S 386). Here, the home position adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether home position adjustment control is in progress or home position adjustment control completion, and is set to "0" when home position adjustment control is in progress, and home position adjustment control is completed. When it is set, it is a flag that is set to "1".

  Next, if S364 is NO, or after S386 is completed, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the number of drops requested is less than 0 (S387). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S387 that the number of drops requested is not less than 0 (if NO in S387), the payout CPU 301 ends the count switch detection process.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S387 that the number of requested drops is less than 0 (if YES in S387), the payout CPU 301 has an excess of gaming balls actually paid out with respect to the requested number of drops. It is determined that the number of over pays is “1” (S388).

  Here, the overpaid number is the number of gaming balls exceeding the number of drops required when the number of gaming balls actually paid out is excessive with respect to the number of drops required, that is, when the excess payout occurs. For example, if the number of game balls actually paid out is 16 while the number of requested drop is 15, since one game ball is overpaid, "1" is added.

  The payout CPU 301 counts the total number of gaming balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B by adding the above-described overpaid number (total number of gaming balls actually paid out) Can be stored in the RAM 303 as the difference between the.

  Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference storage unit. The overpaid number is accumulated in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. As the predetermined initialization operation mentioned here, for example, power on / off and the like can be mentioned.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. If the power is not turned on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the total work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion The work area including the three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be cleared depending on the purpose by selectively combining them.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the number of overpay has reached 10 or more (S 389). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of gaming balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of gaming balls actually paid out) with the payout request number. It is determined whether or not the difference (the total number of overpayers) has reached 10 or more.

  In S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpay is not 10 or more (when the determination in S389 is NO), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of gaming balls relating to overpayment to be within the allowable range (allowable value). The count switch detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpaid pieces is 10 or more in S 389 (when the determination in S 389 is YES), the number of gaming balls relating to over payout is not within the allowable range If it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the value, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S390), and the count switch detection process is ended.

  Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of gaming balls relating to overpayment is within the allowable range (allowable value), and the number of gaming balls relating to overpayment is within the allowable range. When it is, it is a flag which is set to 0 and which is set to 1 when the number of gaming balls relating to overpayment is not within the allowable range (more than the allowable value).

  In addition, when the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the predetermined initialization operation described above is performed. .

[Motor start wait process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the motor activation waiting process performed in S336 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the motor start wait process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S401). If the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 in S401 (if S401 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that origin adjustment control is in progress, and shifts the processing to S406.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 in S401 (when the determination in S401 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether the second stop factor flag is 1 (S402).

  In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop cause flag is 1 (when the determination in S402 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop cause and starts the motor activation. End the waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S402 that neither the first nor the second stop cause flag is 1 (when the determination in S402 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop cause. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S403).

  In S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S403 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and the motor End the startup waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 in S403 (when the determination in S403 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S404).

  When the payout CPU 301 determines in S404 that the payout request number is not greater than 0 (when the determination in S404 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor activation waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request number is greater than 0 in S404 (when S404 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and a motor start initialization process (see FIG. 90) is executed (S405).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S406). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S406 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if the determination in S406 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and shifts the processing to S407. Therefore, when the determination in S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S406 (if S406 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the retry count is 12 It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S408). Therefore, if the determination in S406 is YES, origin adjustment control is performed.

  Here, the number of retries is the number of times of origin adjustment control, and more specifically, is a value that is added each time the number of motor operations to be described later is updated. In the home point adjustment control, a driving amount necessary for paying out one gaming ball to the sprocket 173 and then paying out the next gaming ball, that is, a driving amount necessary for paying out one gaming ball (payout driving amount) Because only the payout motor 174 is driven, the payout drive amount required to pay out this single ball of game balls (16 steps = the unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times in the first embodiment) The number of motor operation is 1). Here, the unit drive amount as excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

  Therefore, each time the motor operation number is set (updated) at S410 described later, the number of retries is added, assuming that the home position adjustment control is completed once. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is the control common to the retry control, it can be said that the number of times of retry is the number of times of retry control.

  Thus, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 has reached the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment).

  The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of motor operations as described above constitutes retry value update means. Further, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the motor operation number has been updated, or the number of times the excitation data has been set, that is, the number of retries as the number of times of origin adjustment control (retry control).

  In the first embodiment, three grooves for receiving gaming balls are formed in each sprocket so that three gaming balls are paid out each time the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B make one rotation. There is.

  For this reason, when the number of motor operation is updated six times, the driving amount for only one rotation of each of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (in the first embodiment, 96 steps = 16 steps (unit driving amount (4 In this case, the payout motor 174 is driven in the step) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) × 6 times (half of the 12 retry counts)).

  Therefore, if the number of retries is greater than 12, the driving amount for two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (in the first embodiment, 192 steps = 96 steps (driving amount for one rotation)) × This means that the dispensing motor 174 has been driven by a driving amount exceeding 2). The number of times of retrying of 12 times is the upper limit number of times of retry control in which 16 steps (unit driving amount (4 steps) × 4 times) are set as one set.

  In S408, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12 (when the determination in S408 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process moves to S407.

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 detects that the game ball is not detected by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B, and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds 192 steps (upper limit drive amount) or the retry count is The driving of the payout motor 174 is controlled so as to stop the payout of the gaming balls until the predetermined initialization operation is performed, on the condition that the number of times exceeds the upper limit number of times. Thus, the home position adjustment control (retry control) is completed. As the predetermined initialization operation mentioned here, for example, power on / off and the like can be mentioned.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. If the power is not turned on again by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion A work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  In S407, the payout CPU 301 sets an activation state of the payout motor 174 (S407), and shifts the processing to S414. In this process, when the determination in S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed, so that the acceleration state or the like of the payout motor 174 according to the drop request number is set so that the normal game ball payout is performed. When the determination in S408 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state to stop the payout of the gaming ball.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S408 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (if the determination in S408 is NO), the payout CPU 301 steps the step counter mask value 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. It sets to (S409). In this process, four steps are set as a unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 at the time of origin adjustment control execution.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S410), and sets four times as the origin request retry number (S411). In this process, the payout drive amount necessary to pay out one gaming ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in the above-described S409 by the four times set as the origin request retry frequency. 16 steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S412). Here, after the dropping ball monitoring timer drives the dispensing motor 174 with the excitation data for a unit driving amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control, whether there is a falling ball or not and whether or not a stop factor occurs Is a timer for measuring the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the home position adjustment control) for monitoring.

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is an excitation data holding period as a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the dispensing motor 174 for four steps (in the first embodiment) 30 ms) and a cooling period (100 ms in origin adjustment control) for cooling the dispensing motor 174.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” in the origin adjustment completion flag (S413). Next, after the end of S407, or after the end of S413, the payout CPU 301 sets excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S414), and ends the motor activation waiting process.

  In this process, for example, when performing origin adjustment control, 16 steps (unit driving amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count)) as a payout driving amount necessary to pay out one gaming ball Set the excitation data. Further, when a normal game ball is to be paid out, excitation data for a predetermined number of steps is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the game balls for the number required to be dropped. The excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the gaming ball is stopped.

[Motor start initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, motor start initialization processing performed in S405 in the motor start waiting processing (see FIG. 89) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of a procedure of motor start initialization processing according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 sets the drop request number from the payout request number (S421). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set in accordance with the payout request number (total amount of payout amounts). For example, in the case where the number of requested dispensings (the total of the dispensing amount) is 20, the number of requested droppings is set to 15. On the other hand, when the requested payout number (total amount of payout amount) is 10, the drop requested number is set to 10, which is the same number as the requested payout number.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs security ball monitoring setting processing (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of times of ON detection monitoring in the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B according to the number of drops requested.

  For example, when the number of drops requested is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the number of ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B in accordance with the number of drops requested. For example, when the number of drops requested is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

  Here, the above-described ON detection monitoring number and monitoring time are initial values of the first and second security sphere counters 305A and 305B set in the security sphere monitoring initial setting process of S312 during the power-on process of FIG. 83. , And different from the initial values of the first and second security ball timers 306A, 306B.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” to the first and second falling ball confirmation flags (S 423). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S424), and sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "1" (S425).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S426). The falling ball monitoring timer, which is cleared here, drives the dispensing motor 174 with the excitation data for the driving amount necessary for dispensing the drop request number in the normal dispensing control in which the origin adjustment control and the retry control are not executed. It is a timer for measuring the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in the normal payout control) which monitors whether or not there are falling balls for the number of the drop request number and whether or not the stopping factor has occurred.

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here is composed of an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the first embodiment) and a cooling period of the dispensing motor 174 (470 ms in normal dispensing control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a fixed period.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter to 0 (S427). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

  For example, in the case where the requested number of drops is 15, when the dropping operation of 15 gaming balls, ie, the payout operation is completed, the value of the step counter becomes a value of 240 steps. In this process, the payout CPU 301 clears, for example, the value of 240 steps counted as described above.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S428), and ends the motor start initialization process. As a result, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 required to pay out one gaming ball.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 102, the characteristic portions relating to the payout control in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an excitation method of the payout motor 174 of the first embodiment. Dispensing motor 174 is a two-phase excitation method, and employs a method capable of switching between high current and low current.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 forward by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3 and t4. However, in the first embodiment, the dispensing motor 174 is structurally incapable of reverse rotation.

  Here, a position where both “A−” and “B−” of the payout motor 174 are on is set as the origin. Note that “A + and B + (indicated by“ S ”in the figure)” of the dispensing motor 174 indicate on / off by software control, and “A− and B− (indicated by“ H ”in the figure)” indicate that software is It represents on / off by logic inversion of the output.

  However, in the first embodiment, since there is no detection means such as a conventional index sensor, it is necessary to perform phase alignment of the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. Such phasing of the origin is origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform phasing is referred to as origin adjustment control.

  The origin adjustment control is performed using the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when origin adjustment is required (if there is a target factor of origin adjustment). For example, origin adjustment control is performed using the payout operation of the first gaming ball of the drop request number at the first payout request after power-on.

  Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, it is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of requested payouts. . As shown in FIG. 92, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by reception interruption.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 300 transmits payout error information data to the main control circuit 70, as shown in FIG. 92, when an error occurs with regard to the payout of the gaming ball.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 perform unilateral communication, but as shown in FIG. 94, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 may communicate with each other.

  Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, the serial communication system is used as the most desirable form, but the present invention is not limited to the serial communication system, and a parallel communication system Various communication methods such as can be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the payout control circuit 300 transmits error information including payout control error information to be described later to the main control circuit 70 using a serial communication method after detecting an error by self-diagnosis.

  At this time, the minimum transmission interval of the error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the first embodiment), and as shown in S 337 when the error information changes continuously. Instead of transmitting the error information to the main control circuit 70 every time the error information changes using the command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms, as shown in FIG. And transmit error information after the minimum transmission interval or the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

  In addition, as a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 96, each bit numerical value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

  At this time, when the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 are received as error information, the main control circuit 70 performs masking on each parameter to acquire error information (payment control error information).

  Management of error information in the payout control circuit 300, management of error information in the main control circuit 70, and management of error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 97 shows a notification mode of error information in the payout control circuit 300, a notification mode of error information in the main control circuit 70, and a notification mode of error information in the sub control circuit 200.

  Specifically, the lower control full state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized as the lower control full detection by the main control circuit 70, and the sub control circuit 200 determines based on the error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70. A message "Please remove the ball" is notified via the liquid crystal display device 13.

  Also, regarding the one out of ball state, the two out of ball state, the motor abnormal state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the excessive payout abnormality, the dispensing ball jam, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality and the communication error in the payout control circuit 300. The main control circuit 70 recognizes the abnormal delivery detection, and based on the payout error information sent from the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit reports "Please call a clerk" via the liquid crystal display device 13.

  As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of pieces of error information related to the delivery control to be sent, divided into two types of "lower balance full error information" and "other information".

  By transmitting and receiving such error information, in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 perform serial communication with each other, the error information is continuously transmitted at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300. Even in the case where the error information is changed (error information, multiple occurrences of errors can be expressed), it is possible to perform synthesis of the error alert.

  For this reason, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit the error information after being requested to transmit the error information from the main control circuit 70 (or after there is a transmission request), and the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300 is performed. It is possible to transmit error information at intervals or at predetermined times.

  Further, although the error information (disbursement control error information) has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be synthesized as the synthesis of commands.

  Next, winning ball control processing in the first embodiment will be described. In the prize ball control process, at least the above-described origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, origin adjustment control in the prize ball control process will be described.

  As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when the target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, as the target factors when performing home adjustment control using the winning ball control processing, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when the power is restored, when an underpayment occurs after the home adjustment control is completed, At the time of cancellation of the cause of suspension, at the time of cancellation of the cause of abnormal dispensing, and at the time of overpayment.

  For example, when there is a step out of the payout motor 174 or a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of gaming balls is not secured as an underpayment occurrence after completion of the origin adjustment control Nevertheless, there is a case where the 15-ball security switch 172 detects the gaming ball due to the short circuit and the intermittent state occurs.

  The origin adjustment control at the time of cancellation of the stop factor is performed, for example, as a response to the backflow of the gaming ball at the time of the short circuit of the lower plate full tank switch 179. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of cancellation of the payout abnormality factor is performed, for example, as a response when the origin is physically shifted due to a disconnection, a short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Furthermore, the origin adjustment control at the time of overpay occurrence is performed in consideration of the step out of the payout motor 174 thereafter.

  In the origin adjustment control, one game ball can be dropped (payout) when the payout motor 174 is driven 16 steps as described above, so 4 step × 5 ms drive as a unit drive amount is performed, The point at which the falling ball confirmation is finished within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = the excitation data holding period 30 ms + the cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as the physical origin (origin adjustment completed). When it is not possible to check the falling ball within the falling ball monitoring time, the above-described driving of the dispensing motor 174 is performed 16 steps in 4 steps.

  However, when the falling ball can not be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps, it is determined that normal payout can not be performed (or it may be determined that there is a stop factor), The drive of the payout motor 174 in units of four steps is repeated for two rotations.

  In addition, “repetition of the drive of the dispensing motor 174 for two rotations” means that the state of the dispensing motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the point when it is determined that the falling ball can not be detected even if the dispensing motor 174 is driven. As (or the rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for one rotation of the motor, it is indicated that driving for 96 steps is performed.

  This can also be expressed as equivalent to driving capable of dropping 12 balls, and the payout motor 174 or the sprocket 173 is driven (or rotated for a certain amount of rotation angle or rotation angle) to be able to drop a predetermined number of gaming balls. It can also be expressed that driving is performed.

  Note that although the origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, if the falling ball is not counted as a paid-out game ball, over-payment will result. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling ball at the time of completion of the origin adjustment control as the paid-out game ball.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one from the requested drop number to 14 pieces under the condition that the falling ball is detected by the counting switch 181 when the origin adjustment control is being executed. As a result, upon completion of the home position adjustment control, the remaining drop request number (14 pieces) excluding one drop is paid out with respect to the drop request number. Thereafter, a normal payout operation is performed.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart of origin adjustment control using a winning ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 98, the stop factor is canceled after the power is turned on again, and thereafter, when the payout request is generated, the home point adjustment control is executed, and first excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms The dispensing motor 174 drives four steps based on the above. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from the low current to the high current with the start of the home position adjustment control.

  Thereafter, when driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is finished, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to the low current, and thereafter the current is maintained at the low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

  Further, the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on the free fall theoretical formula.

  Thereafter, when the falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of drop requests which were three at the start of the origin adjustment is updated to two. Further, detection of the falling ball completes the home position adjustment control, and the phase shift with the structural home position is eliminated.

  FIG. 99 is a timing chart of an origin adjustment retry operation after origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, if the operation (which is referred to as an origin adjustment cycle) for driving the dispensing motor 174 for four steps based on the above-described 4 steps × 5 ms of excitation data is performed only once, If it can not be detected, the same home position adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after the start of the home position adjustment control, a total of 4 home position adjustment cycles are repeated.

  However, if the falling ball can not be detected even after four home adjustment cycles have been performed, four home adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, a period during which the first four home adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. The origin adjustment cycle is unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry frequency). In FIG. 99, although the operation started when the counting switch count switch 181 does not detect the falling ball during the basic retry operation period is the origin adjustment retry, the operation is not limited to this, and the basic retry operation period The mode of repeating up to the upper limit number of times may be used as the origin adjustment retry.

  FIG. 74 is a timing chart of a basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing, that is, a normal payout operation. Further, FIG. 100 is a timing chart taking as an example a payout operation when 15 gaming balls are paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 100, when 15 pieces of drop request numbers are determined, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 is determined by the payout CPU 301 based on the determined drop request numbers (15 pieces). Specifically, excitation data required to pay out 15 gaming balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determination unit.

  Next, when the excitation data required to pay out 15 gaming balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to the high current and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the dispensing motor 174 gradually accelerates to become a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

  Thereafter, when driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data is finished, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (the excitation data holding period as a holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to the low current, and thereafter, the current is maintained at the low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

  Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During this falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. Also, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

  Then, during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) described above, it is monitored by the payout CPU 301 whether or not the falling of the game balls for the required number of drops (15) can be confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not gaming balls corresponding to the requested number of drops (15) are detected through the first and second count switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that performs such determination constitutes a payout determination unit.

  When the payout CPU 301 can not confirm the drop of the game ball for the requested drop number (15 pieces) during the above-mentioned drop ball monitoring time (500 ms), the game ball corresponding to the drop request number (15) is the first When it is determined that the detection is not detected through the second count switch 181A, 181B, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred, and the idle motor is shifted to stop the driving of the payout motor 174 thereafter. As a result, the dispensing operation can not be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, also in the case where it is possible to confirm the drop of the game balls for the drop requested number (15) during the drop ball monitoring time (500 ms) described above, the idle state is entered in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

  Here, the excitation data corresponding to the drop request number in the basic payout operation of the winning ball control processing is as shown in FIG. For example, when the number of drop requests is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 101A, excitation data for performing the acceleration state and the deceleration state for two game balls is obtained.

  101 (b) shows the case where the number of requested drops is four, FIG. 101 (c) shows that when the requested number of drops is three, and FIG. 101 (d) shows the case where the requested number of drops is two. (E) represents excitation data in the case where the number of drop requests is one. The above-described drop ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided regardless of the number of drop requests required.

  FIG. 102 is a timing chart of the payout operation in the case where the retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing. Further, FIG. 102 is a timing chart taking as an example a payout operation when paying out five gaming balls.

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the payout operation for the requested number of drops (five pieces) is executed, if the gaming ball relating to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, the falling occurs. When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) has elapsed, one drop is required for the drop request number (five). As a result, it is determined that the payout CPU 301 can not confirm the dropping of the game balls for the requested drop number (five pieces) within the dropping ball monitoring time (500 ms).

  As described above, when an underpayment occurs in which the number of game balls paid out with respect to the requested number of drops (five) is insufficient, an origin adjustment retry similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed shown in FIG. The action is taken. The contents of this origin adjustment retry operation are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Next, error processing in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107. FIG.

  The errors relating to the payout of the game ball in the first embodiment include (1) excessive payout, (2) blocked-out ball, (3) full bowl, (4) out-of-round ball, (5) malfunction of the payout motor, etc. . When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout state notification display device 178 (see FIG. 33). Each of these errors will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 103 shows the payout state notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, the payout state notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. One of these segments a to g and DP is turned on according to the error type and the like.

  For example, (1) the segment b lights when notifying an error of over-dispensing, (2) the segment d lights when notifying an error of a dispensing ball jam, (3) lower plate When notifying a full error, the segment of f lights up, (4) When notifying an error of out-of-balls, the segment of e lights up, and (5) When notifying a payout motor abnormality The segment of c lights up.

  The DP segment is turned on to notify that the ball is being rented. Therefore, by visually recognizing the lighting state of the segment of the payout state notification display device 178, the manager of the hole can easily determine what kind of error has occurred.

  First, (1) Overdelivery is not considered as a stop factor even if it occurs, and it is an error that can continue the dispensing operation. The notification trigger for this overpayment error is, as shown in FIG. 104, that the number of gaming balls overpaid after the completion of the number of requested falling pieces is overprescribed number (over 10 in the first embodiment). It is the timing that became.

  In FIG. 104, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first count switch 181A, and is turned on when the gaming ball is detected. The payout detection signal B is also a signal indicating whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second count switch 181B.

  Also, this overpayment error is canceled by turning on the power again. That is, the trigger for canceling the overpayment error is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also canceled.

  Next, (2) the dispensing ball clogging is an error based on a stopping cause generated due to, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of gaming balls, adhesion of dust or contamination, foreign matter or disconnection or short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 105, for example, when the discharging detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A is not turned off even after 100 ms has passed, the discharging ball is clogged, that is, the stopping cause is generated. It is judged. When it is determined that the cause of the stoppage has occurred, it is considered as a notification timing of an error of the dispensing ball jam.

  When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the discharge control circuit 300 can not directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit. Therefore, the stop control can not be performed until the above-described 12 home position adjustment control retry operations are completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stopping cause has occurred when the falling ball monitoring time after the completion of the retry operation of the home position adjustment control for 12 times has elapsed.

  Also, if it is possible to recognize or judge a short circuit of the counting switch 181 by constantly monitoring a change in voltage that may occur between the payout control circuit 300 and the counting switch 181, an error of The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started simultaneously with the notification of the error.

  Further, the notification of the error of the discharge ball clogging is canceled by removing the above-mentioned factors such as the ball clogging due to the reverse flow, the adhesion of dust and contamination, the disconnection of the counting switch 181, and the short circuit.

  Next, (3) the lower tray full tank is an error based on the stopping factor generated when the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 22 are full. As shown in FIG. 106, for example, it is determined that the stopping cause based on the lower filling condition has occurred when the lower filling condition switch 179 has not been turned off even after one second has passed. When it is determined that the cause of the stoppage has occurred, it is considered as a notification trigger of the error of the lower bowl full tank.

  Further, the notification of the error of the lower tray full is released by discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 22 in the full state.

  Next, (4) when the ball breakage is detected, for example, by the 15 ball security switch 172 that there is a shortage of security balls, the ball supply passage 171 is in a waiting state for refilling the game balls to the ball tank 161. This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when a ball jam occurs or when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is broken.

  Such a ball breakage error is caused by the first stop factor flag or the second stop factor flag based on the comparison result between the first and second security ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B. This occurs when the stop factor flag of is set to 1.

  The notification trigger of this ball breakage error is at the time when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, the error of this ball breakage, the game ball being replenished to the ball tank 161, or the game ball which is the cause of the ball clogging is removed by the specified number (15 pieces) of game ball in ball supply passage 171 It is canceled by being secured. At this time, notification of the ball breakage error is also canceled.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107, for (5) withdrawal motor abnormality, a retry operation for 12 times is executed based on, for example, an origin adjustment cycle, and a falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the 12th retry operation elapses. Is an error based on the stopping cause that occurs due to the fact that the falling ball can not be confirmed.

  As a cause of occurrence of such a stop factor, for example, when the game ball having tackiness does not stick to the sprocket 173, when the ball bites between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (motor rotation failure), foreign matter There may be a case where a step out occurs due to a motor non-rotation state (only excitation data is updated) such as mixing.

  The notification trigger of this payout motor abnormality is, as shown in FIG. 107, when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. Further, this dispensing motor abnormality is canceled by turning on the power again. That is, the trigger for canceling the dispensing motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the dispensing motor abnormality is also canceled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the reception processing of the payout control circuit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off in the first embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108, when an XINT interrupt (power failure) at the time of power failure occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the delivery control circuit 300 side, polling the received data in the XINT interrupt results in 1 byte Relieve.

  Also, assuming that a power failure occurs immediately after the main control circuit 70 writes to the transmission buffer, the payout control circuit 300 can receive after the delay of the baud rate time even during the processing of the XINT interrupt. It is preferable to take into account the elapsed time to receive in the XINT interrupt. However, it is a condition that XINT of the interruption processing of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur earlier than the main control circuit 70 electrically.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the values (first values) of the first and second security ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively, on the condition that the payout of the game balls is started. And update the value (second value) of the first and second security ball counters 305A, 305B.

  For this reason, if the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the gaming balls after the game balls have been paid out, when the first value becomes 0, The second value smaller than the first value is already zero. In this case, it is ensured that the game balls are replenished in accordance with the payout of the game balls.

  On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value is 0, it means that the game ball is not replenished according to the payout of the game ball for some reason.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the updated first value with the second value to determine whether or not the replenishment of the game ball has been properly performed according to the payout of the game ball. Can be judged.

  As a result, the first and second comparisons are made as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game balls are replenished, for example, simply by detecting the presence or absence of the game balls by the first and second 15 ball security switches 172A and 172B Management and guarantee of the game ball accumulated in the ball supply passage 171A, 171B can be performed accurately.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment prohibits the game balls from being paid out when the first value is 0 and the second value is not 0, so the first and second ball supply passages 171A. , 171 B can be confirmed as to whether or not there is an abnormality regarding the supply of gaming balls. This can further improve the security regarding the supply and the payout of the game balls.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, even when the first value is 0 and the second value becomes 0 and it is once ensured that the game ball is replenished, Thereafter, until the game balls are paid out, for example, due to a defect in the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the game balls are excessively paid out, and the inside of the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B If the number of gaming balls has decreased, the payout of gaming balls can be prohibited.

  As a result, the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be more accurately managed, and the security regarding the supply and payout of the game balls can be further improved.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes retry control to drive the payout motor 174 by the unit driving amount (4 steps) until the gaming ball is detected by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B. Since this is possible, even if a slit sensor or the like for detecting the drive position of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is not provided, for example, it is possible to perform a retry operation for eliminating a bite.

  In addition, when such a retry operation is performed, the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second count switches 181A and 181B detect the game balls are adjusted as the origin. Since the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

  As described above, since the retry operation can be used not only at the time of ball biting and the like but also at the time of adjusting the origin, the retry control can have versatility, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. .

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is not provided with a slit sensor or the like, so that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine can be made simple and low-cost.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit driving amount (4 steps) of the payout motor 174 at the time of retry control causes the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B to pay out one gaming ball. Since it is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball after that, the first and second count switches 181A and 181B are divided into multiple times in order to pay out one game ball Can be driven. Thereby, for example, in the case where a ball bite or the like has occurred, this can be eliminated, and when the adjustment of the origin is performed, the adjustment can be made to the accurate origin.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the unit driving amount (4 steps) described above is a driving amount obtained by dividing the payout driving amount (16 steps) into four times, when paying out one game ball The number of times of driving the payout motor 174 can be divided into a plurality of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball is not detected by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit drive amount (192 steps). The dispensing means can be stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the winning ball case unit 170 due to the repetition of the excessive retry operation.

  Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, there is no game ball stored in, for example, the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B by stopping the payout motor 174. It is possible to urge that it is necessary to restore the winning ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 from an abnormal state.

  In addition, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1, some abnormality Thus, after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped, the retry operation can always be performed.

  As described above, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the driving stop of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the process can be smoothly performed as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes the retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until the gaming ball is detected by the first or second count switch 181A, 181B, and the motor operation number Since the number of times (the number of times of retrying) is updated is managed as the number of times of retrying operations, regardless of the presence or absence of detection of the gaming ball by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B And can be easily grasped. Moreover, even if the slit sensor or the like is not provided, the number of retry operations can be grasped reliably and easily. Thus, management of the retry operation can be smoothly performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the number of retries exceeds the upper limit (12 times) without detecting the gaming ball by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B, the origin adjustment control (retry is performed Since the control is terminated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the winning ball case unit 170 due to the repetition of the excessive retry operation.

  In addition, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the total number of gaming balls actually paid out with the number of payout requests, the total number of gaming balls actually paid out and the number of payout requests as a result of the comparison. If there is a difference between them, it can be grasped as an overpayment of the game ball.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned difference resulting in overpayment becomes equal to or more than the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. It is possible to prevent further overpayment from taking place when there is an unnatural overpayment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when an overpayment occurs, the overpayment is the difference between the total number of gaming balls actually paid out until the initialization operation is performed and the requested payout amount. The number of such game balls can be accumulated.

  This makes it possible to reliably detect, for example, the fact of an unnatural over-payment caused by a wrongdoing and the like, and the unnecessary game ball payout amount (the number of winning balls and the number of lent balls) caused by the over-payment.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after the payout motor 174 is driven, the game balls corresponding to the requested number of falling balls are operated by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Since it is determined whether or not it has been detected, it is possible to cool the payout motor 174 during the falling ball monitoring time, and at the same time to check whether or not the payout of the game balls corresponding to the number requested to be dropped has been made. Can. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the amount of payout (the number of winning balls and the number of lending balls) while securing a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174 is a holding period and the payout motor 174 for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B after the discharge motor 174 is stopped, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are caused by inertia force. It is possible to prevent over-rotation. Further, the discharge motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

  Furthermore, if the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops are not detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped, so the holding period and The driving of the dispensing motor 174 can be efficiently managed using the cooling period.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the real time clock 80 is provided, but the other configurations are configured in substantially the same manner. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and in particular, only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109, in the second embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 includes a real time clock 80. The real time clock 80 is connected to the sub CPU 201.

  Here, the real time clock 80 is a device capable of specifying the current "year (year)", "month", "day", "day of the week", "hour", "minute" and "second" It is. The real time clock 80 is realized as a serial interface type real time clock module incorporating a crystal oscillator. Since the sub CPU 201 is connected to the real time clock 80, the time information specified by the real time clock 80 can be acquired by the sub CPU 201. The real-time clock 80 is operated by the power supply when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power, and when the power is turned off, an independent power supply such as a backup power supply or a button battery supplied even in the event of a power failure. Operated by Therefore, the real time clock 80 can identify the current time even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the real time clock 80 is provided, various effects corresponding to the current time can be performed.

[Point addition table]
In the first embodiment, points corresponding to the lottery are added using the point addition table stored in the program ROM 202, and it is possible to shift to the “first high probability state” according to the accumulated points. The

  Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the point addition table is stored in the program ROM 202, but the point addition table corresponds to different times for each character displayed for each determined effect content The points added are different according to the time of day. As a result, the points to be added in the case of losing are different depending on the time of playing the game and the characters displayed according to the effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the changing game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The point addition table according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a view showing an example of a point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, a plurality of characters (characters A to C) exist in accordance with the contents of the effect of the miss reach effect. That is, there are a plurality of lost reach effects corresponding to a plurality of characters. In addition, when the time corresponding to each character is decided, and the lose reach production by the character corresponding to the time in the game is performed, it is added more than the case where the lose reach production of other characters is performed Points are likely to increase. Therefore, it can be said that the probability of shifting to the “first high probability state” is high. Therefore, if a character corresponding to the time of playing a game is displayed in the effect, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player compared to the case where other characters are displayed.

  For example, the character A may correspond to 8:00 to 12:59, the character B may correspond to 13:00 to 17:59, and the character C may correspond to 18:00 to 23:59. Here, the effects of the fluctuation pattern command “83H02H” and “83H03H” are the miss reach effects. The sub-control circuit 200 having received the variation pattern command determines the detail contents of the reach effect, that is, which of the characters A to C is displayed by lottery. The probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed may be the same (one third of each). As shown in FIG. 110, the points to be added differ depending on the relationship between the character displayed by the effect and the game time for all the random number values “9” in “83H02H” and “83H03H”. For example, when the variation pattern command is "83H02H" and the acquired random number value is "9", when the character A is displayed in the "second high probability state", the time is 8:00 to 12:59. In the case of, the point to be added is 50, but the point to be added is 20 at other times. Similarly, when the character B is displayed in the "second high probability state", the point to be added is 50 if the time is from 13:00 to 17:59, but is added at any other time There are 20 points. Similarly, when the character C is displayed in the "second high probability state", the point to be added is 50 if the time is 18:00 to 23:59, but is added at any other time There are 20 points. The same applies to the case where the variation pattern command is "83H03H". Further, the “normal gaming state” is also the same as the “second high probability state”, but as in the first embodiment, the “second high probability state” is set so that points can be easily accumulated.

  Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the stop symbol and effect contents determination processing may be performed according to the point determined using this point addition table (see S1072 in FIG. 69).

As described above, the time and the displayed character are made to correspond to each other, and point addition is different, but the time and the displayed character are made to correspond to each other, and the number of provided navigation times is different. It may be That is, when the time corresponding to the character is determined in advance, for example, when the character corresponding to the time when playing the game is selected, the big hit navigation lottery table different from that used at other times It is assumed that the number of navigations that can be granted is defined more frequently than that used at other times in the big hit navigation lottery table. As a result, the number of times of navigation to be given increases, and it is possible to inevitably increase the probability of giving navigation. In addition to determining the number of times of navigation by lottery, it is also conceivable to determine the probability of providing navigation by means of lottery whether or not to perform navigation.
In the first embodiment, a lottery in which navigation is provided with a probability of 1/10 is performed in the lost super reach B. However, in the second embodiment, such a lottery may be performed. Moreover, you may perform the lottery by which navi is provided in a loss super reach A. Furthermore, as described above, the winning probability may change according to the time and the character displayed. This case will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a view showing an example of a lost super reach lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 111, when the displayed character corresponds to the time, the probability of winning the navigation is higher than in the case where the character does not correspond. In addition, the number of navigations provided is also increasing. As described above, since the advantage and disadvantage for the player differ depending on the time, the player plays with expectation of being in an advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, although FIG. 111 is a case of a lose super reach A, similarly, in the case of a lose super reach B, the probability of winning the navigation by the combination of the displayed character and the time, and the number of provided navigation May be changed.
Note that the probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed is the same as each other, but may be different. For example, the probability that the character corresponding to that time is displayed may be lower than 1/3.

  Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, in particular, only processes including steps different from the first embodiment.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, timer interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 112, the process of S1301 is added between the process of S1023 and the process of S1024, which is a point different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 64) of the first embodiment. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

  When the processing of step S1023 ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1301. In S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs time management processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for acquiring and updating data about the standard time which is a reference from the real time clock 80. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, various effects using standard time can be performed. For example, predetermined processing can be performed at a specific time. As a result, a player can be given a privilege at a specific time, or a special effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Determination process during the first high probability state]
With reference to FIG. 113, the first high probability state effect generation processing by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the processing of S1302 is added after the processing of S1129, which is a point different from the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 72) of the first embodiment. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

  If the process of S1129 is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1302. In S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs navigation lottery on the whole day based on the time. Specifically, when the character displayed by the effect based on the standard time acquired from the real time clock 80 is the character corresponding to the current time, the sub CPU 201 is the “fourth high probability state with a probability of 1/20. If the player wins, the fourth high probability state flag is set. If the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, this transition lottery may not be performed. Further, when the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, the transfer lottery may be performed with a lower probability than the winning probability in the case where the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time. . When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

In addition, the set time flag may be set when the time set in advance by the real time clock 80 comes regardless of the displayed character. Then, if the first hit after the setting time flag is set is the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, the "fourth high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/1, and the "fourth high probability state" It is sufficient to shift to the high probability state. In addition, even if the first time after the set time flag is set, the set time flag is set to OFF, and the subsequent hits become the "big hit" of Special Figure (1) -12. May be elected to the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/10, and may be shifted to the “fourth high probability state”.
Thus, there is a possibility that so-called all day navigation can be obtained even when the RAM is not cleared or the power is turned on. Therefore, even if the player is not immediately after the opening of the store, the player will enjoy the game expecting navigation all day throughout the day. In addition, since navigation can be acquired all day without RAM clear work and power on work, the amount of work on the hall side can be reduced and an increase in the number of customers can be expected.

  Further, for example, by setting the navigation to be obtained once a day using the real time clock 80, it is possible to realize a 24 hour navigation in which the entire navigation state is continued for 24 hours. That is, after the store is closed, navigation will continue all day on the next day. As a result, it is difficult to give the player a sense of injustice and an increase in the number of customers can be expected.

Also, for example, a high probability gaming state other than the above may be provided in the “normal gaming state”, and navigation may be easily given at specific times using the real time clock 80 for at least some high probability states. That is, it may be determined to have a high probability gaming state in which the ease of providing navigation changes in accordance with the time.
For example, characters A to C are displayed with a probability of 1⁄3 in effects in the “first high probability state”, and a special hit of special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11. Even if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, it may be possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state”.
Also, for example, in the “first high probability state”, even if it is a big hit in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7, if the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time When there is a possibility that navigation is not given, and the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time, the probability is higher than when the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time The navigation may be given by The characters displayed in the effect in the “first high probability state” may be different from the characters (characters A to C) in the lost reach effect.

(Embodiment 3)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  Although the third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment especially in that it is possible to switch the payout destination (moving destination) of the gaming ball by the sprocket 173, the other configuration is configured in substantially the same manner. ing. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and in particular, only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the prize ball case unit 170 of the third embodiment has the first and second dispensing passages 180A and 180B as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has a two-row structure. In order to take it, it is the same composition. Therefore, the configuration of the first delivery passage 180A will be described as an example.

  The first payout passage 180A of the third embodiment is a first ball passage 401A for paying out (or guiding, supplying, circulating) the gaming ball to the interior (for example, the upper tray 21 etc.) of the pachinko gaming machine And a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving, paying out, supplying, circulating) the gaming ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the ball circulation path of the island management facility). .

  Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single game machine and a game device (for example, a sand machine, a counter, a data display, etc.) provided for the game machine. Is a management device for managing the state of the game ball and the game machine, and is connected to a facility (for example, a computer or data management device) for managing a game arcade usually called a hall computer, to the hall computer Information on gaming machines is aggregated and data is transmitted.

  Here, the ball circulation path is a facility that enables sharing of gaming balls among a plurality of or single game machines provided in the island management device, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation device. It may not be required to be included in the island management device, but may be included in the gaming machine, or it may be a device for circulating the gaming balls in the gaming machine.

  Similarly, the second dispensing passage 180B has a first ball passage 401B and a second ball passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as “first ball passage 401”, and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as “first 2 ball passage 402 ".

  In addition, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 481A as a first detection means for detecting gaming balls passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided. A first ball pull switch 482A is provided as a second detection means that passes through the second ball passage 402A.

  Similarly, for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B, a second counting switch 481B and a second ball pulling switch 482B are provided. The first counting switch 481A and the second counting switch 481B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 481", and the first ball tapping switch 482A and the second ball tapping switch 482 B are collectively referred to as "ball tapping switch 482". There is a thing called ".

  Further, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage can be used as the payout destination of the gaming ball by the sprocket 173. First and second flappers 400A and 400B as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 are provided so as to switch to any one of 402. The first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

  The flapper 400 has a flapper drive device 410 (see FIG. 115), and the drive of the flapper drive device 410 is controlled by the payout CPU 301 so that it can be turned in the direction of the arrow in the figure.

  Specifically, the flapper 400 sets the payout destination of the game ball on the second ball passage 402 side (the position shown by the broken line in the figure), and the payout destination of the game ball on the first ball passage 401 side. It is pivoted to the position where it is shown (the position shown by the solid line in the figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115, in the payout control circuit 300 of the third embodiment, the above-described first counting switch 481A, second counting switch 481B, first ball removing switch 482A, and second ball removing The switch 482 B and the flapper drive device 410 are connected. Although the flapper drive device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, it may be provided separately.

  When the payout CPU 301 according to the third embodiment executes the above-described retry operation without the number of winning balls and the number of lending balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300, the payout CPU 301 The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper drive device 410 so that the dispensing destination is the second ball passage 402.

  In the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment, when the retry operation is performed in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball becomes the second ball passage 402, the game ball is switched by the ball removal switch 482 The retry operation is ended on condition that it is detected.

  Next, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119, in particular, only processes including steps different from the first embodiment.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, with reference to FIG. 116, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in the system timer interrupt process in the third embodiment, each step of S431 to S435 is the same as S331 to S335 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) in the first embodiment. Description of is omitted.

  After the processing of S435, the payout CPU 301 executes motor drive processing described later (S436), and executes origin adjustment excitation data setting processing (S437). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes command transmission processing (S438), and ends the system timer interrupt processing. The command transmission process (S438) of the third embodiment is the same as the command transmission process (S337) of the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 117, the count switch detection process performed in S435 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 117, in the count switch detection process in the third embodiment, each step of S481 to S490 is the same as S381 to S390 in the count switch detection process (see FIG. 88) in the first embodiment. Description of is omitted.

  When S481 is NO, S487 is NO, S489 is NO, or after S490, the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removing switch 482A or the second ball removing switch 482B is a game ball. It is determined whether the passage of the object has been detected (S491).

  In S491, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball outlet switch 482A or the second ball outlet switch 482B has not detected passage of the game ball (when S491 is NO), the payout CPU 301 The count switch detection process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S491 that the first ball pull switch 482A or the second ball pull switch 482B has detected the passage of the game ball (if YES at S491), the payout CPU 301 It is determined whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S492).

  If the payout CPU 301 determines in S492 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if the determination in S492 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the count switch detection process.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S492 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if the determination in S492 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S493).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S494). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper drive device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the first ball passages 401A and 401B (dispense side) (S495), and the counting switch End the detection process.

[Motor drive processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 118, motor drive processing performed in S436 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S501).

  When the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop cause flag is 1 in S501 (when the determination in S501 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop cause and drives the motor. End the process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S501 that neither the first nor the second stop cause flag is 1 (when the determination in S501 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop cause. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S502).

  In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S502 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and the motor End the driving process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 in S502 (when the determination in S502 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S503).

  In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request number is not larger than 0 (when the determination in S503 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor drive processing.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request number is greater than 0 in S503 (if YES in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and executes the motor start initialization process ( S504). The motor start-up initialization process is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs an activation state setting process of the payout motor 174 (S505). In this process, since the payout CPU 301 does not perform origin adjustment control, the CPU sets the acceleration state or the like of the payout motor 174 according to the number of requested drops, so that the normal game ball payout is performed.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S506). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets excitation data for a predetermined number of steps as a drive amount necessary to pay out the game balls for the number required to be dropped, assuming that the normal game balls are paid out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “1” in the payout control flag (S507), and ends the motor driving process. Here, the payout control flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set depending on whether or not to switch the flapper 400, and is set to “1” when switching the flapper 400, This flag is set to “0” when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Home adjustment excitation data setting process]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed in S437 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S511). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S511 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if S511 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. Do. Therefore, when the determination in S511 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S511 (if S511 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the retry count is 12 It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S512). Therefore, if the determination in step S511 is YES, origin adjustment control is performed.

  If the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is greater than 12 (if the determination in S512 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In S513, the payout CPU 301 sets an activation state of the payout motor 174 (S513), and shifts the processing to S523. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop the payout of the gaming ball.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (when the determination in S512 is NO), the payout CPU 301 resets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S514).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S515), and determines whether the payout control flag is 1 (S516). In S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (when S516 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process proceeds to S518. In this case, the switching of the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is not performed, and the payout destinations of the game balls are maintained on the first ball passages 401A and 401B (payout side).

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is 1 in S516 (when S516 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B. Then, the flapper driving device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B side (ball extraction side) (S517).

  Next, if S516 is NO or after S517, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to four steps in preparation for origin adjustment control (S518). In this process, four steps are set as a unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 at the time of origin adjustment control execution.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S519), and sets the origin request retry number to four (S520). In this process, the payout driving amount necessary to pay out one gaming ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in the above-mentioned S518 by four times set as the origin request retry frequency. 16 steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S521). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as that of the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” to the origin adjustment completion flag (S522).

  Next, after the end of S513, or after the end of S522, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S523), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. In this process, for example, in the case of performing origin adjustment control, excitation data for 16 steps is set as a payout driving amount necessary to pay out one gaming ball.

  Further, when a normal game ball is to be paid out, excitation data for a predetermined number of steps is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the game balls for the number required to be dropped. The excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the gaming ball is stopped.

  As described above, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment exhibits the following effects.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, each of the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B receives one of the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402 as the payout destination of the game ball. Since the flapper 400 to be switched to one side is provided, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when payout of the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine is performed, for example, when the game ball is rented or winning. At this time, it is possible to switch the payout destination of the gaming ball by the sprocket 173 to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine, the payout destination of the gaming ball by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. Can. As a result, excessive payout of the game ball due to the origin adjustment control (retry control) is prevented.

  Therefore, by switching to one of the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the home point adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball being paid out of the gaming machine. be able to.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment executes origin adjustment control (retry control) without the payout amount (the number of winning balls and the number of lending balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Since the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 becomes the second ball passage 402, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the game machine Even if it is, the excessive payout of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be prevented.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, since the home point adjustment control (retry control) is terminated under the condition that the ball removing switch 482 detects the game ball, the payout amount stored in the RAM 303 (the number of winning balls and Even if the home position adjustment control (retry control) is executed in a state where there is no lent ball number), the counting switch 481 does not detect the game ball.

  Therefore, the game ball paid out from the sprocket 173 is paid out to the outside of the gaming machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of winning balls and the number of lending balls) stored in the RAM 303. It can be prevented from being detected as a game ball. Thereby, the range of operation of origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Embodiment 4)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the fourth embodiment, in particular, after the completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining drop request number obtained by subtracting one ball from the drop request number (for example, the remaining drop request number if the number is 15 before subtraction) Is different in that 14 game balls are paid out, but the other configurations are configured in substantially the same manner.

  Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and in particular, only differences from the first embodiment will be described. Specifically, only processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The processing (for example, system timer interrupt processing) other than the processing described below is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 120, the count switch detection process performed in S335 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the count switch detection process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B detects the passage of the game ball (S581). In S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B does not detect passage of the gaming ball (when S581 is NO), the payout CPU 301 selects the counting switch. End the detection process. Here, if the home position adjustment control is in progress, the gaming ball is not detected yet by the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B, so the determination in S581 is NO.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S581 that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (if YES in S581), the payout CPU 301 requests drop The number is decremented by "1" (S582).

  That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the drop request number on condition that the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a breakout payout amount update unit.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the subtraction of the requested payout number in the count switch detection process is not performed. The requested payout number is equal to the number of gaming balls for the requested drop number (determined) when the requested drop number is determined (set) in S627 in the motor start-up initial process (see FIG. 122) described later. It is being subtracted.

  In other words, when the number of requested drops is determined (set), the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of gaming balls for the determined number of requested drops (set) from the requested number of payouts. There is. The payout CPU 301 which performs such subtraction of the game balls constitutes subtraction means.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S583). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if the determination in S583 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the count switch detection process.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if YES in S583), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S584).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S585). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets a flag after origin adjustment execution to 1 (S586), and ends the count switch detection processing.

  Here, the flag after origin adjustment execution is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether it is after execution of origin adjustment control or before execution (unexecuted), and origin adjustment control is performed. It is a flag that is set to “1” after execution of and is set to “0” before execution of home position adjustment control.

[Motor start wait process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the motor activation waiting process performed in S336 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the motor start-up waiting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S601). If the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 in S601 (if S601 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that origin adjustment control is in progress, and shifts the processing to S605.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 in S601 (when the determination in S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether the second stop factor flag is 1 (S602).

  In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop cause flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop cause and starts the motor activation. End the waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S602 that neither the first nor second stop cause flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop cause. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S603).

  In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S603 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and the motor End the startup waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 in S603 (when the determination in S603 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and will be described later. The motor start initialization process (see FIG. 122) is executed (S604). In the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of requested payouts is greater than zero.

  For this reason, in the fourth embodiment, a payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined based on the payout request flag. The payout request flag is simultaneously transmitted, for example, when information on the number of payout requests is sent from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. The payout request flag is set to “1” when a payout is requested, and is set to “0” when no payout is requested.

  Here, since the processing of S605 to S613 is the same as the processing of S406 to S414 in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted.

[Motor start initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the motor start initialization process performed in S604 in the motor start waiting process (see FIG. 121) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the motor start-up initial process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the flag after origin adjustment execution is 1 (S621). In S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after origin adjustment is not 1 (when S621 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that it is before (or not executed) origin adjustment control. , And moves the process to S623.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after origin adjustment execution is 1 in S 621 (if S 621 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that origin adjustment control has been executed, and the drop CPU 301 falls. It is determined whether the requested number is 0 or less (S 622).

  If the payout CPU 301 determines in step S622 that the drop request number is not 0 or less (if S622 is NO), the payout CPU 301 leaves the drop request number as it is, that is, in the count switch detection process (see FIG. 120). The process proceeds to step S628 with the number of drops requested after being decremented by "1" in step S582.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the number of dropped requests is 0 or less (if YES in S622), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initializes) the number of dropped requests. Then, the value of the drop request number is reduced to the payout request number (S623).

For example, when the value of the drop request number becomes “−1” due to excessive payout of the game ball, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the payout request number that has already been subtracted by the drop request number.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the drop request number (“−1” in the case of overpayment) after being decremented by “1” in S582 of the above-described count switch detection process (see FIG. 120) in the payout request number. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes reflection means. When the process of S623 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of requested payout and the number of requested drop are “0”.

  Here, the payout CPU 301 sets the drop request number after “1” is subtracted in S582 of the above-mentioned count switch detection process (see FIG. 120) when all the game balls for the payout request number have been paid out. If it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that performs such determination constitutes a payout error determination unit.

  For example, when the number of game balls for the required payout number is paid out and the required drop number after subtraction is larger than “0”, it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the number of balls required to be paid out is paid out and the requested number of drops after subtraction is smaller than “0”, it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the payout request number is smaller than “−10” (S624). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the number of overpays has reached 10 or more.

  In S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the requested payout number is smaller than “−10” (when the determination in S 624 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of gaming balls relating to over-payout within the allowable range. Then, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S625), and the motor start initialization process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the payout request number is not smaller than “−10” in S 624 (when S 624 is NO), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of gaming balls relating to over payout. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1 (S626).

  In S626, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is not 1 (when S626 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request of the game ball from the main control circuit 70, End motor start initialization processing.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is 1 in S626 (if YES in S626), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S627).

  In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set in accordance with the payout request number (total amount of payout amounts). At this time, simultaneously with the setting of the drop request number, the payout request number is subtracted by the set drop request number.

  Here, since the processing of S628 to S634 is the same as the processing of S422 to S428 in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted.

  As described above, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment exhibits the following effects.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of requested drops is updated on condition that the gaming ball is detected by the first or second count switch 181A, 181B. That is, the requested drop number is updated each time the gaming ball is detected by the first or second count switch 181A, 181B.

  Thereby, for example, when there is a payout (over payout) exceeding the number required to be dropped when the payout motor 174 is driven to dispense the game balls according to the number required to be dropped, The drop request quantity can be updated in consideration of the number.

  On the other hand, the requested payout number is decremented by the number of gaming balls for the requested drop number when the requested drop number is determined, and then the updated requested drop number is reflected. As a result, even if the above-described over-payment is caused by driving the payout motor 174 once, the number of gaming balls subtracted from the requested payout number and the number of gaming balls actually paid out It can be matched.

  As a result, since it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 each time an excessive payout occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, the payout of the game ball can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed type gaming machine, and a launching means for launching the gaming ball is installed at the upper portion of the gaming machine, and the launched gaming ball passes through the gaming area provided in the gaming board. (The game board itself may be a game area.) The present invention is also applicable to an enclosed type game machine collected in a ball polishing apparatus or a pumping apparatus provided in a game machine.

  In the case where the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a means (for example, a screw or the like) for pumping the gaming ball provided in the pumping device with a sprocket, a payout motor Drive means for driving the means for pumping (for example, the lifting motor), and the counting switch is the discharge detection means from the pumping device (for example, a sensor for managing the circulation of the game ball, etc.) Good.

  According to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the gaming ball passes through the payout passage 180, is dispensed to the upper tray 21 provided on the front of the gaming machine, and moves from the upper tray 21 to the launcher 15. The gaming machine according to the present invention is also applicable to a device such as that which is pumped up and down with respect to the launcher 15.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the delivery passage 180 may be integrally formed. The term "integrally" as referred to herein includes a state integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking or the like.

  In the case where the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, the four configurations exemplified in the case where the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage in the vicinity of the sub rocket 173 are integrally formed. The two configurations may be extracted and integrally formed according to the configurations separated.

Similarly, in the case where the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the dispensing passage 180 are integrally formed, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed. Three configurations may be extracted from the four configurations to be performed, and may be formed by a case-separated configuration.

  In addition, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a game member (for example, a ball polishing device of a decoration unit or an enclosed type game machine, etc.) constituting the game machine. This is nothing less than the application of the gaming machine according to the present invention even when the device provided with the member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to the gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided with a configuration capable of moving the game ball like the sub rocket 173, and generally speaking, the game ball existing in the ball supply passage 171 interlockingly with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173 Is movable, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data retention period), and when the excitation data retention period elapses, the current of the dispensing motor 174 becomes low. It is switched and maintained at low current for 470 ms (cooling period) thereafter. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period), but the present invention is not limited to this. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) may be configured by the period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

  By having such a configuration, it is also possible to finely adjust the position of the sprocket 173 in the sprocket adjustment period, and forward rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball catching may be repeated. In addition, heat detection means capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided, and the payout control circuit 300 can determine that the payout motor 174 is abnormal that the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is a predetermined value or more than a predetermined range. May use the sprocket adjustment period as a continuous cooling period.

  Furthermore, even if the heat detecting means is not provided, the payout more than a predetermined value (for example, the payout of 10 balls or more when the maximum 16 balls are paid out) continues continuously more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or more) The sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a fixed value. Normally, there is no need to set the sprocket adjustment period to perform cooling because a sufficient cooling period is provided, but since the environment is different for each game arcade where the gaming machines are installed, the payout motor is performed in the original cooling period. The cooling of 174 may be insufficient. Therefore, assuming such a case as described above, it is possible to pay for the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it is possible to pay out more safely.

  As described above, when the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), falling occurs. It can also be expressed that the cooling period of the dispensing motor 174 is extended based on the extended ball monitoring time, and is also expressed as the falling ball monitoring time is extended based on the extended cooling period. Is possible.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, the shape, the material, and the driving method are particularly controlled if the dispensing CPU 301 is controlled to switch the flapper 400 to any one of the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402. It is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 114, it may be in the form of a plate, or it may be horizontally moved by treating a game ball falling from the top of the ball passage so that the game ball can not pass through one ball passage. As a result, it may be a mechanism capable of distributing game balls, or provided with a mechanism similar to that of the sprocket 173, and in such a manner as to receive the game balls once and then guide the game balls in any direction. It may be.

  Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as excitation data corresponding to unit drive amount, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, one unit drive amount is not set. The dispensing motor 174 is driven at 5 ms × 16 steps as excitation data at the number of retries, and the excitation data holding period after stopping the driving of the dispensing motor 174 at 5 ms × 16 steps is set to 30 ms + cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms. Is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time obtained by subtracting the excitation data holding period, cooling period, and time required for one retry (5 ms × 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period Set as falling ball monitoring time, stop factor occurrence within falling ball monitoring time, or specified number of times (2 If the retry of 0 times) is finished, it is also possible to transition to the idle state. At this time, the upper limit number of times for the number of retries is 240, and the time taken for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, since a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, it becomes possible to use the falling ball monitoring time as the time for storing by intermittent prevention when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected, It becomes possible to pay out more safely.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the number of requested fall is made by subtracting the number of gaming balls moved by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the number of detected gaming balls by the count switch 181 in retry control. Although (department payout amount) is set, “to set the drop request number (department payout amount)” mentioned here may include contents such as determination, update, and change.

  Further, although the payout in the above embodiment of the present invention is premised on the payout of gaming balls as gaming media, the present invention is not limited thereto, and gaming media in which medals, credits, and electronic management are performed as gaming media It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media which are handled in terms of the number and amount of money.

  Note that the "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes the case where the position of the game ball is moved by the game ball control means, such as payout, lending, retry control, lifting and the like. Therefore, the present invention is applicable to any case as long as the position of the gaming ball is moved by the gaming ball control means described above.

  In addition, “the game ball moves” means that the game ball is freed when the game ball is directly pressed by the game ball control means, is pulled, or the locking of the game ball is released. The game ball moves indirectly, which is assumed when one or a plurality of game balls are moved indirectly as a result of moving one game ball by the game ball control means when starting to fall or as a result of moving one game ball by the game ball control means Including the case.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned structure. For example, although the execution of the navi is performed according to the number of navi given, the continuation rate lottery may be performed to give the navi continuation rate. That is, for example, it is possible to stock a plurality of navigations having continuation rates such as 0%, 50%, 80%, etc., and when performing navigation, perform continuous lottery according to the continuation rate and whether navigation is continued or not It may be determined. If you win, you will continue to draw the same drawing at the same continuation rate next time. If you do not win, this navigation will disappear, but if the navigation is stocked, the navigation will be continued using the next navigation. It is good to do a continuous lottery at a rate. The continuation rate 0% is a state in which the navigation does not continue and ends in only one time. In the case where all the navigations are given, the navigation should guarantee execution of the navigation for three times, and then the continuation rate lottery may be performed. Further, in the case of all navigation, it is also possible to provide navigation with a 100% continuity rate, in which the number of continuations is limited to three.

  In addition, for example, as the effect during the “big hit game”, it is shown that the number of navigations is decided in advance and the result is shown by the effect, but the player succeeds in the mini game etc. in order to give the technical intervention of the player. It is also possible to give navigation when it is. For example, it is assumed that an eye-pushing game having multiple difficulty levels is executed during a big hit game, and if the low difficulty level game is successful, 0% continuous navigation is given, and the high difficulty level game is successful. All navigation may be given. The mini game may be other than the eye-press game, for example, a quiz or the like.

  In the "second high probability state", if the hit content is "with no balls normal" (special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12), the set game is not performed after the "big hit gaming state" To the “first high probability state” of the “normal gaming state”. Therefore, an effect is performed that makes it possible to recognize transition to the “first high probability state”. However, due to this effect, the player may recognize that the gaming state shifts, and may misunderstand that the degree of expectation of the “big hit” is thereby increased. Therefore, an effect that suggests transitioning to the “normal game state (sub)” may be performed before an effect that makes it possible to recognize transition to the “first high probability state”. Thereby, the player recognizes that the player has transitioned to the "normal gaming state (sub)" after the "big hit gaming state" despite actually shifting from the "big hit gaming state" to the "first high probability state" From the above, it is possible to suppress the above misunderstanding.

In addition, in the "time saving game" after 50 times, we decided to perform navigation suppression such as not executing navigation from the viewpoint of "capture shooting" prevention, but a player who is performing "time saving game" more than 50 times It is not always the case that they are doing "capture". Therefore, for example, a right-handed sensor for detecting gaming balls is installed in the right area of the game area 12a so that it is possible to detect that a right-handed game is being made. Based on the detection signal of the right-handed sensor or the like, the normal timing by the normal constant firing and the abnormal timing caused by operating the firing handle 25 may be determined.
For example, as shown in FIG. 123, the game board 12 may be provided with rails 59 for guiding the right-handed sensor 58 and the game ball to the right. FIG. 123 is a front view showing a configuration of a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 123, the same members as those of the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals. The game board 12 shown in FIG. 123 is substantially the same as the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 except that it has a right-handed sensor 58 and a rail 59.
In FIG. 123, the right-handed sensor 58 is installed at the upper right of the game board 12. Further, the rail 59 is also installed at the upper right of the game board 12, and the rail 59 is disposed at a position where the gaming ball is guided to the rail 59 when the player is executing the right strike. In addition, the game ball guided to the rail 59 is arranged to pass the right-handed sensor 58 without fail. As a result, when the player is hitting the right, the gaming ball always passes the right hitting sensor 58, and it is determined whether the player is firing the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming board 12 or not. It can be judged.
As described above, the normal timing and the abnormal timing can be determined based on the detection signal of the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a and the detection signal of the right-handed sensor 58. Thus, it is estimated that "capture" is being performed if it is an abnormal timing although navigation is being performed that 16 rounds of "big hit games" are being performed. If the output timing of the detection signal by "capture attack" is detected (abnormal detection), it can be inferred that "capture attack" is being performed regardless of the number of "time-saving games", in which case navigation is suppressed Just set the flag.

  In addition, when the time from the output of the detection signal from the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a to the output of the detection signal from the right-handed sensor 58 is too long, it may be inferred that it is a "shooting strike". . Since the output timing of the detection signal by the normal strike method is different from the output timing of the detection signal by the "capture attack", it can be inferred that the "capture attack" is performed.

  In addition, when the first abnormality detection is made, "warning" is given, the second warning is given last, and the third time navigation is canceled etc. It may be taken.

  Moreover, although it is assumed that the ordinary symbol is known, the ordinary symbol and the special symbol may be related. For example, when it is decided to have a plurality of ordinary symbols, and "per unit V", the ordinary symbol and the first big prize which were triggered for the opening of the second starting opening 45 which was the opportunity for the "per unit V" It is good also as performing a lottery of next time navigation based on a special symbol in opening of device 54.

  For example, it is decided that there are two types of normal symbols, normal symbols (1) and normal symbols (2), and if it is a combination of normal symbols (1) small hit (2)-1 with high probability in the next navigation lottery If it is determined that the combination is a normal symbol (2) small hit (2) -4, it may be determined at a low probability in the next navigation drawing. As a result, the player can play a game with interest even at the time leading up to "V hit".

  Further, in the case of “per-V”, the navigation lottery probability may be changed in accordance with the number of winnings at the time of the winning of the second starting port 45 which is the trigger. Furthermore, notification of the number of winnings may be performed. For example, the content may be displayed such as "If three balls or more enter the second starting opening 45 and hit V, the next navigation is decided". As a result, the player can play a game with interest even at the time leading up to "V hit".

  In the above embodiment, the execution of the navigation is performed according to the number of assigned navigations, but not limited to this, for example, even when the number of navigations is one or more, the navigation is used It may be determined by lottery when a time college is won or not. As a result, in order to perform such a release effect during the big hit, it is possible for the player to wish for the game with more interest during the big hit.

  The present invention is applicable to an enclosed game machine. In the enclosed type game machine, the number of game balls in the game machine is constant, and the number of game balls is managed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. Therefore, detection is also performed for the launched game balls, and the number of launch balls is managed. Therefore, in the case of applying the present invention to an enclosed type game machine, for example, a ceiling lottery may be performed based on the number of emitted game balls. For example, it may be determined whether or not a "big hit" has been won every time 1500 game balls are fired, and if it has not been won, a ceiling lottery may be performed. In addition, in the case where the player does not win a "big hit" even if 15,000 pieces are fired, it is possible to win 100% in the ceiling lottery. As described above, by using the number of shots of the gaming machine as a reference, the ceiling state is uniformly given without being affected by the ease of winning on the starting opening.

  In the above embodiment, the ceiling lottery is performed and it is decided to shift to the “third high probability state” immediately if it is won, but for example, even if it is won, it does not immediately shift, and after winning, the special symbol game It may be made to shift after 20 times have been performed. Then, during this 20 times, an effect (a so-called anticipation effect) may be performed to notify that it will win the ceiling lottery after this. As a result, the player can know the gaming state and the like to be transferred from now on, and can play the game with a sense of expectation. Also, in general, only a few minutes of holding the game ball can perform such precursor effect, but it can perform precursor effect over more game period, and the player feels an expectation for a relatively long time It is possible to have it.

  Although it is described that the navigation lottery on the whole day has a high probability by clearing the RAM, as described above, the power on the gaming machine may be turned on, and the navigation lottery on the whole day may have a high probability.

  The content of the navigation effect, the trigger for giving the number of navigation times, and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the “first high probability state”, when the special view type is the special view (1) -1 to the special view (1) -7, all the navigations, ie, the number of times of navigation are given three Are not limited to three, for example, only two may be provided. However, it is preferable that the “first high probability state” is more likely to be given navigation than the gaming state other than the “first high probability state”.

  In the above embodiment, although the advantageous first special game is the one having a large number of rounds, the number of sets in the time-saving game state is eliminated, and the case of becoming a big hit transitioning to time-saving game is made the first special game, time-saving game The second special game may be a normal jackpot that does not shift. Then, if navigation is provided, the first special game and the second special game are not limited as long as there is an advantage and disadvantage for the player, such as performing a launch navigation when a small hit is to be the first special game.

[Application example]
In each of the above-described embodiments and the above-described various modifications, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above are also applicable to other gaming machines, for example, to various gaming machines such as slot gaming machines, spinning drum gaming machines, ball and ball gaming machines, gaming machines, and enclosed game machines. You can also For example, the invention can also be applied to an enclosed type pachinko machine which is a kind of ball and ball game machine, an arrange ball, a baseball ball and the like.

  Background art and problems (parts 1 to 8) of the configuration described in the above-described embodiment will be described.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 1)]
Among players who enjoy playing with pachinko gaming machines and pachislot gaming machines, there are players who have selected gaming machines in anticipation of being in an advantageous state for the players. However, in general, it is difficult to find a gaming machine that is advantageous to the player without playing a game. Generally, on the hall side, it is desirable to reduce the number of gaming machines which are advantageous to the player if possible, while the gaming machine for the purpose of attracting customers during a time slot where the number of players decreases. There is also a hall that wants to make the player advantageous to the player, and there is a demand for a gaming machine that can set the gaming machine to the player advantageous condition.

  For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-22248, the gaming state when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on again, the game can be started in the gaming state. A gaming machine is disclosed. In such a gaming machine, when the hall is closed in a gaming state advantageous to the player, the gaming machine is turned off while the gaming state is advantageous to the player. If the power of this gaming machine is turned on immediately before the opening of the next day, the gaming machine will be in an advantageous gaming state for the player who is in the state when the store was closed the previous day. When such a gaming machine is installed, the player who has closed time in the advantageous gaming state enjoys the game in the advantageous gaming state by playing with the gaming machine from the opening time of the next day be able to. Thus, the player may be able to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state.

  However, in this gaming machine, unless the power is turned off in a gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the gaming state which is advantageous to the player at the next power-on will not occur. It is not always the case that the gaming machine is in an advantageous gaming state for the player after the gaming machine is turned off, that is, after the store is closed. Therefore, in this gaming machine, it is difficult to realize a gaming state advantageous to the player at a desired timing on the hall side.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can execute a state advantageous to a player at a desired timing.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 2)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a number of game balls are paid out according to the game balls that have won in the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game.

  For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the wing member changes its posture to an open position in which the opening and closing area is opened, and the game ball can enter the opening and closing area. There is a pachinko gaming machine to be. In this pachinko gaming machine, the V winning opening is provided in the opening and closing area, and the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the game ball winning in the V winning opening during the small hit game. In this pachinko gaming machine, a small hit symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit gaming state when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state in the V winning opening during the small hit game. The game state after the big hit game is finished is determined according to the type of. In addition, when the gaming state changes, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state changes. As a result, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the game ball easily wins the small hit game during the time saving game, and the opening and closing area is easily opened. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if it is not in time saving game, there is a case where it moves to the big hit game state, there are times when game state is changed. As described above, when the gaming state changes, the number of gaming balls that the player can acquire changes as a result. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, when the gaming state changes, the number of gaming balls that can be obtained by the player changes as a result, not a certain percentage. Therefore, it is suppressed that a game becomes monotonous.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is possible to suppress that the game becomes monotonous. However, it is only a point regarding the number of game balls that the player can acquire. Even when the player continues playing the game for a long time, it is preferable that the gaming machine has a configuration capable of further suppressing the game from becoming monotonous in order to play the game intensively without getting bored. In the case of not having such a configuration, there is a problem that when the game is continued for a long time, the player will eventually get bored with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game without being bored by the player and improving the interest of the game. I assume.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 3)]
Among pachinko gaming machines, for example, there is a so-called one-type / two-type mixed type as disclosed in JP-A-2010-273786. In this pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol lottery is executed when the gaming ball is won in a predetermined starting opening. Then, after the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display, the symbols indicating the results of the special symbol lottery are stopped and displayed. Here, when the predetermined big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, it becomes a 1 type big hit and the first special game is executed. On the other hand, when the predetermined small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the wing member for closing the variable specified winning opening is activated, and during this time, the gaming ball enters the variable specified winning opening and passes V zone If it does, it becomes 2 types big hit and 2nd special game is executed.

  The pachinko gaming machine is provided with a variable start-up opening that is opened only while the ordinary motorized part is operating, separately from the predetermined start-up opening, and is executed when the game ball wins the variable start-up opening. It will be a small hit with a relatively high probability in the special symbol lottery done. In this pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to relatively increase the winning probability of the opening and closing lottery of the variable starting opening executed by the game ball passing through the predetermined passing area, and of the variable starting opening when the opening and closing lottery is won. When extending the open time, the game may be controlled in the short game state. In the short time game state, the possibility that the game ball enters the variable specified winning combination is relatively high, and the game ball is likely to pass through the V zone to be a two-type big hit. Further, even if the game ball does not pass through the V zone, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out even if the game balls enter the variable specified winning combination. Thus, it can be said that the time saving game state is an advantageous game state for the player.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned JP-A-2010-273786, since the time saving gaming state is advantageous for the player as well as the one type big hit and the two type big hitting, the time saving game state is long It can be said that continuing is preferable for the player. Therefore, some players perform the game ball emission operation at such a timing that the game ball does not pass through the V zone even if the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening. By making such game balls not to pass through the V zone until just before the end of the duration of the short time game state, it is possible to further increase the number of game balls paid out.

  However, such irregularities by the player are not desirable for the hole side. Therefore, there is also a hole that prohibits this irregular hitting, and measures such as caution are taken when a player who has made an abnormal hitting is seen. However, it is necessary to keep watching the game for a while to find out that the game is out of order, and it can not be easily found.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which prevents a player from making an irregular hit.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 4)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Will be paid out. Since this gaming ball can be redeemed, the player is playing a game expecting more gaming balls to be paid out.

  In addition, some pachinko gaming machines may receive points by satisfying predetermined conditions in the game. And by accumulating this point, some kind of privilege is granted. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-42574, points are added by playing a game specified as a point-up condition, and the game level is obtained when this point becomes equal to or more than the “reference points” number. Is calculated, and a lottery necessary for collecting item information used for the game such as music data, character image data, etc. is performed according to the number of game levels.

  In this way, the player can enjoy the game by increasing the points other than increasing the number of game balls.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-42574, being able to collect music data, character image data, and the like is certainly one of the fun of gaming. However, this point is not related to the payout of the game ball, and it can be said that the player is somewhat less interested in the point.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is possible for a player to play diversified games while enjoying the increase of points accumulated in the game, and to improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

[Background Art and Issues (Part 5)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the gaming ball that has won the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time from the closing state.

  By the way, in recent years, in order to improve the effectability, the gaming machine has been provided with movable roles. As such a game machine, Patent Document 1 includes a first movable body, which is a rotating body, and a second movable body, which is a swing arm, and the second movable body is powered to the first movable body. By attaching a plurality of gears to be transmitted and driving the second movable body by a single drive device, the second movable body is swung, and the game is provided with a movable character in which the first movable body is rotated by the plurality of gears. Machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP 2013-146413 A, by attaching a plurality of gears to each movable body, the first movable body and the second movable body are interlocked by a single drive device, but the first movable body Is provided at one end of the second movable body and pivots, and the second movable body pivots with the other end as a fulcrum, so the moving direction of the first movable body depends on the pivoting direction of the second movable body Since the determination is made, the possibility of recognizing the second movable body and the first movable body as separate bodies is reduced, and the individual rendering effects of the plurality of movable members of the first movable body and the second movable body are reduced. There was a risk of

  The present invention solves such a problem and aims to enhance the individual rendering effect of each movable member and improve the interest for the player's effect even when the plurality of movable members are interlocked. I assume.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 6)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the gaming ball that has won the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time from the closing state.

  By the way, in recent years, in order to improve the effectability, the gaming machine has been provided with movable roles. As such a game machine, in Patent Document 1, after each of the first and second upper peach movable members is pivoted to open outward, the first and second upper peach movable members are closed inward. A first magnet and a second magnet provided on the inner side of each of the seams of the first and second upper peach movable members; The first and second upper pink movable members substantially face each other when the first and second upper pink movable members are closed, and in such a state, the first and second magnet portions are arranged in a direction to draw each other. Game machines are disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87611, since the magnet is used to reinforce the end face-end face connection between items, even if the connection between the two items can be reinforced, It is not possible to reinforce the end of the accessory at all for a configuration in which the accessory operates alone, and in order to stabilize the state of the single accessory after the operation, it is possible to The configuration was difficult to apply.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of easily stabilizing the state after the operation of the item by the configuration capable of fixing the item to be operated. .

[Background art and problems (7)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, A number of gaming balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the gaming ball that has won the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time from the closing state.

  By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine provided with a winning device for guiding the gaming ball falling from the upstream to the inside of the winning opening by driving the movable piece in the front-rear direction as viewed from the player. As such a game machine, Patent Document 1 has a winning opening for receiving a game ball flowing down, and is connected to driving means to move forward and backward between the front and rear of the winning hole, There is disclosed a gaming machine provided with a winning device having a ball receiving member for receiving the gaming ball into the winning opening when advancing forward by driving.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP 2011-177281 A, since the ball receiving member advancing and retreating in the back and forth direction between the front and the rear of the winning opening only receives the game ball to the winning opening, the ball receiving member Even if you pick up the game balls excessively, they will all be guided inside the winning opening. If such a phenomenon is repeated, the game will unexpectedly give a large profit to the player, while the game arcade will suffer a large loss unexpectedly, and the balance of profits between the player and the game stadium will be game It greatly deviates from the estimate at the time of machine production.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of solving such problems and accurately managing the balance of profits between a player and a game arcade.

[Background art and problems (8)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launch device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is usually in a closed state, is repeatedly opened several times for a predetermined period. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the gaming ball that has won the big winning opening. Here, there are also those having a feather member in the special winning opening, such a large winning opening is repeatedly operated from the closed state to the open state by operating the feather member to perform the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time from the closing state.

  By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of movable prizes are driven from a standby position at a predetermined timing and form one design without being in contact with each other in front of the display screen after driving. As such a game machine, Patent Document 1 discloses a first movable body pivotably supported via a first movable shaft and a second movable pivot supported via a second movable shaft. By driving the interlocking means for interlocking the two movable bodies, the first movable body and the second movable body, and the interlocking means, the first movable body is oscillated between the first position and the second position. And driving means for swinging the second movable body between the third position and the fourth position, wherein the driving means moves the first movable body from the first position to the second position, and the second movable body to the third position. When the interlocking means is driven in the direction to swing from the position toward the fourth position, the first movable body swings upward and the second movable body swings downward in front of the display screen of the effect display device Game machines are disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2014-46038, a structure in which a plurality of movable actors can not contact after being driven can not compensate for the gap between them by the image displayed on the display screen. Form one design. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to limit the location where one design is to be formed by a plurality of movable features, for example, in front of the display screen.

  In addition, when one design is formed only by such a plurality of movable roles, the momentum of starting the driving of the plurality of movable roles from the standby position is driven as it is to a place where one design is formed. When the movable parts of the above are brought into contact with each other, the impact may damage the movable parts.

  In order to solve such problems, the present invention is to improve the rendering effect by the movable part while avoiding breakage of the movable part when driving the movable part and bringing it into contact with another member. To provide a game machine capable of

1 Pachinko gaming machine 171A, B Second ball supply passage 173A, B Second sprocket 174 Payout motor 181A First counting switch 181B Second counting switch 301 Payout CPU
710 second movable part 711 base member 711 d base tooth portion 712 motor 713 a first movable member main body 713 b first transmission member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a movable part pivoted by the drive of a drive means, comprising:
The movable role is
A first member provided with a first member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge;
A first movable member main body rotatably supported by the first member and rotated by the drive of the driving means, and a gear rotatably supported by the first movable member main body; A first transmission member meshing with the first member tooth portion;
The gaming machine is
Ball supply passage which can accumulate gaming balls,
Moving means capable of moving the gaming ball having passed through the ball supply passage to the payout passage;
A drive unit for driving the moving means;
Control means for controlling the drive of the drive unit;
And a payout detecting means for detecting the gaming ball moved to the payout path by the moving means.
The control unit is configured to stop the drive of the drive unit for a certain period of time after driving the drive unit, and perform determination regarding detection of the gaming ball by the payout detection unit during the certain period,
The predetermined period includes at least a holding period for holding the posture of the moving means and a cooling period for cooling the drive unit,
During the holding period, the current applied to the drive unit is maintained as the current at the time of driving the drive unit,
During the cooling period, a current applied to the drive unit is lower than a current when the drive unit is driven.

Images